Home

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP

1. Conforms to IEC61131 3 cos tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Type of software OS OS Operating system system hana Windows 2000 abe ee ae Windows XP 100MB or more FPWINProFEN6 g guag Windows Vista Note1 The small type and upgrade version is not available for Ver 6 Note2 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver 6 1 free of charge at our web site http www panasonic electric works com peweu en html 22164 php Use the latest version Type of computer and suitable cable For the connection between a personal computer RS232C and the control unit RS232C D sub connector cable PC side connector PLC side connector Specifications Product No D sub anih female Mini DIN round 5 pin L type 3 m AFC8503 i female Mini DIN round 5 pin Straight type 3 m AFC8503S Note A USB RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect with a personal computer without a serial port using a PC connection cable 1 8 Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit 2 1 2 1 Parts and Functions 2 1 1 Parts and Functions L14 Control unit L30 Control unit Side view Common to each unit le Ll B DIN rail attachment il ta E L40 L60 Control unit Note This figure shows L40 type State that the expansion cover was removed ore IDOOGOOOO900000 gt 9800000000000 _ Seeoooo00G00006 Status indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or
2. result in 32 bits Q Available Not available Not available partially V TiU Tl CO aJU W OJN N 14 44 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH BCD arithmetic instructions m0 atten ee addition addition PDB aE PEPE agokan addition PDB 4 digit BCD data subtraction 8 digit BCD data D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D subtraction PDB subtraction D ed ale subtraction PDB sain plleettn 8 digit BCD data S1 1 S1 X S2 1 2 gt D 3 D 2 multiplication PDB a D 4 digit BCD data S2 quotient D division PB pea DT9015 8 digit BCD data DB S1 S2 D S141 S 1 S2 1 2 quotient division D 1 D remainder DT9016 DT9015 mama p fee elelee increment PB 1 8 digit BCD data D 1 D 1 D 1 D etk Jolo ofolo ngremeni PDB 1 on PB 1 digit BCD data D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D OE PDB 1 oe compare instructions 16 bit data CMP 1 S2 compare PCMP 32 bit data DCMP 1 S2 r 1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A on compare PDCMP 141 S 1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on 141 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on 16 bit data band WIN 1 S2 S3 S1 gt S3 gt R900A on compare PWIN S2 lt or S1 lt or S3 RYOOB on S1 lt S2 gt R900C on QO Available lt Not available Not available partially T U NIO v T O Dd oO oO 14 45 FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP10SH 32 bit data DWIN S1 S2 S3 S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on band PDWIN S2 1 S2 lt or S14 1 S1 lt or S3 1 wl
3. Operation during rewrite 1 External output Y is held 2 External input X is ignored 3 The timer T stops the clock 4 Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left right sift registers are ignored 5 Interrupt functions are stopped 6 Internal clock relays special internal relays are also stopped 7 Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite Set values for timer counter instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value areas SV Values in the elapsed value area EV do not change Operation of rewrite during RUN complete flag The rewrite during RUN complete flag R9034 is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program 11 4 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is Not Possible When the timeout error message is indicated Even if the timeout error message is indicated it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been already rewritten Carry out the following operations FPWIN GR x Timeout eror while changing program in PLC Program may differ from PLC Please click below Help button to find the way how to solve it 1 When ladder symbol mode As a ladder editing is left set it to the off
4. X2 Positioning start signal X3 Home return start signal X4 JOG start signal X6 JOG start signal X7 Overrunning signal YO Pulse output CW Y1 Pulse output CCW R10 Positioning operation running R11 Positioning operation start R12 Positioning done pulse R9120 Pulse output CHO instruction flag 7 4 4 Pulse output control instructions F0 Pulse output control instruction FO e This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input e Specify this FO MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration In case of CHO X3 In these programs the near home input is HDF FO MV H 110 DT90052 enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations FO MV H 100 DT90052 Z Operations executable by Pulse output control instruction F0 DT90052 Type of _ Software reset Resets the value in an elapsed value area Example For CHO DT90400 and DT90401 Count Disables or enables the count of an elapsed value area Example disable enable For CHO DT90400 and DT90401 3 Stop of pulse Forcibly stops the pulse output during the execution of the pulse output ou
5. Fo MV HO wRO F14DMV HO DT50 FIDMV HFFFFFFFF DT60 L R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31 R2 is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 RO R2 la Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39F sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 Fe1DcMP DT50 DT60 R1 R900B sa E A 1 gt F36D 1 DT50 Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 2 words of the local unit to 55 the address No H7788 in the unit number 07 from COM1 R1 H F145 SEND DT 100 DT50 H7788 K FO MV H1 wro J 70 Sends a command to read the address No H7788 in the unit number 07 from COM1 and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 F146 RECV DT 101 H7788 K2 Dreo FO MV HO WRO 7 Flow chart For Type Il Data initialization DTS0 and DT51 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 and DT51 a F145 Sends a data Sends a data Execute F146 RECV SEND instruction instruction write command read command Turns RO off The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data No H7788
6. No 413 Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Set the value to match the external device connected to the communication port Both the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No 415 should be set for the COM port No 416 Starting address for data received For the tool port No 420 No 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received For the tool port No 421 For the general purpose serial communication setting Receive buffer is required To change this area specify the starting address using system register No 416 or 420 and the volume number of words using No 417or 421 The receive buffer layout is shown below When setting for the tool port and the COM port both do not specify the same buffer number Receive buffer Starting area specified The number of in system register no gt Et a received bytes 416 420 fn i is stored here The number of words is gS Received data specified in system regis storage area ter no 417 421 6 28 6 5 8 Connection with 1 1 Communication General purpose Serial Communication When using tool port FP X0 All types
7. S2 to four digits of BCD data and data stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 gt H3412 432 1 F75 16 bit binary BINA S1 S2 D Converts the 16 bits of binary data P75 data gt ASCII PBINA specified code by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of ka pole 001 Available Not available Not available partially 14 46 FP2SH FP10SH Description ASCII code gt 1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 16 bit binary and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and data stores it in D 001 32 bit binary DBIA 1 S2 D Converts the 32 bits of binary data S1 1 data ASCII PDBIA S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area code of S2 bytes ASCII code DABI S1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 32 bit binary PDABI and S2 to 32 bits of binary data and 111010 0 data stores it in D 1 D 16 bit binary BCD Converts the 16 bits of binary data data gt 4 digit PBCD specified by S to four digits of BCD data BCD data and stores it in D Example K100 gt H100 4 digit BCD BIN Converts the four digits of BCD data data 16 bit PBIN specified by S to 16 bits of binary data binary data 32 bit binary DBCD data gt 8 digit PDBCD BCD data data gt 32 bit PDBIN binary data 16 bit data INV plement of 1 16 bit data Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 complement of inverts the sign 2
8. When performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws Set the mode selector to PROG Mode Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program Operation procedure when using FPWIN GR Ver 2 Select Online Edit Mode on the FPWIN GR On line menu Select Clear Program on the Edit menu When the confirmation dialog box is displayed click on Yes to clear the program Request concerning program storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs the user should consider the following measures Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs destroying files or overwriting the contents of a file documents should be printed out and then saved Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Also if a possword is forcibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point Upload protection When the upload protectio
9. control Pulse output control Pulse output S n Positioning pulses are output from Trapezoidal the specified channel in control accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S 5 o o Pulse output S n Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse output JOG PLSH S n Pulse strings are output from the operation 0 and 1 specified output in accordance JOG positioning _ with the contents of the data table that starts with S F173 PWM output PWMH S n PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S As for FP X0 only the high speed counter elapsed value match ON OFF can be used 14 52 FP2SH FP10SH _ Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S Pulse output Selectable data table control peration data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Performs the home return according to the specified data table Input pulse 1 S2 D Measures the number of pulses measurement and cycle of pulses to be input to No of pulses the high speed counter of the cycle for input specified channel pulses 3 Available for FP X0 L40 and L60 types only Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated Pu
10. Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 D Inverts each bit of data of D and stores it in D Example H100 K100 Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data and stores it in D 1 D 32 bit data Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and complement of adds 1 inverts the sign 2 absolute absolute PDABS extension PEXT P90 PDECO 7 segment SEGT decode ENCO Encodes part of the data of S and stores Bee leice it in D The part is specified by n 16 bit data UNIT S n D The least significant digit of each of the n combine PUNIT words of data beginning at S are stored united in order in D Q Available gt Not available Not available partially Gives the absolute value of the data of D Gives the absolute value of the data of D 1 D Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in D 1 D Decodes part of the data of S and stores it in D The part is specified by n Converts the data of S for use in a 7 segment display and stores it in D 1 D 2 ie C3 EA Cy C oO D l 3 BS S S S S S S S S S 3 J 3 J J 3 J D D D D n D D n D n F76 P76 F77 P77 F78 P78 F80 P80 F81 P81 F83 P83 F84 P84 F85 P85 F86 P86 F87 P87 F88 P88 F89 P89 F91 P91 O EA D D O
11. F175 SPSH DT 100 KO R9120 R500 R504 R502 DF A R502 R9121 R500 R504 R503 HDF AH R503 R502 R503 TO R504 R504 TMX 0 K 3 Control code 10 Fixed E Control assignment 0 Interpolation E Type 0 Linear interpolation 0 Fixed E Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only E Operation mode assignment 0 Increment 1 Absolute E Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 1 32 Precautions during programming Specify the composite speed to make the component speed of each axis be 6Hz or more Set the composite speed Initial soeed to be 30 Hz or less For the linear interpolation instruction F175 specify the same value for the acceleration time and deceleration time To perform the operation only to the negative direction in the incremental mode set the target value to zero To perform the operation only to the negative direction in the absolute mode set the target value to the same as the current value 7 33 7 4 12 Pulse Output Instruction Flag Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the pulse output Allocation and role of pulse output instruction flag When a pulse output instruction F171 F 1 72 F174 F175 F177 or PWM output instruction F173 is executed and pulses are being output the pulse output instruction flag of the corresponding channel is ON No
12. F60 CMP DT90053 H830 Data comparison instruction 1 The value of the special data register DT90053 Hour minute data is compared with the value of H830 8 30 R900B RO ee a ated eee ot eee ee ee tf Comparison match is output RO RO YE ge nel ese mg e a ai DF t Appointed time output pulse 1 second YO Fo oan page eat Sooo TMX 0 K10 0 1 second type timer p K10 is set and used as a 1 second type timer The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DI90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits in the BCD format This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time BCD and the R900B flag special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time 9 3 9 2 Sampling Trance Function For L40 and L60 types 9 2 1 Overview The sampling trace function is available for the FPOR Using this function enables to take samplings and record accumulate the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing and to examine the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary timing The sampling trace function is used by Time chart monitor under the online menu of the FPWIN GR The instructions functions special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace function are as below Name Operation O Z OoOO S F155 SMPL sampling instruction F156 ST
13. If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is on prior to switching to RUN mode make a program as below using R9014 initial pulse off relay R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan lt Example 1 gt DF leading edge differential instruction XO YO DF gt _1 i Add R9014 XO R9014 HHH RUN Power on XO YO p Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the DF instruction is off to on at the second scan therefore derivative output is obtained lt Example 2 gt CT counter instruction X0 CT 100 X1 yAn R9014 14 R9014 ae i 100 o RUN Power on XO CT100 counting operation a Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the counter is off to on at the second scan therefore the count is incremented 11 2 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction If a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction it will be executed only under the following condition The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the previous control instruction was reset and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE JP or LBL the opera
14. R9099 R909A Turns on when Unit No 13 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 14 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode R909C R909D R909E R909F WR910 FP X0 Address R9100 to R910F 14 19 WR911 to WR913 FP X0 Address _____ Name Description Cs High HSC CHO T high speed counter channels by F166 HC1S speed HSC CH1 urns on hig spee coun er channels y or F167 HC1R instruction during control counter HSC CH2 Turns off when clearing the control or on the completion control ai flag HSC CH3 of this instruction R9114 to R911F ibe PLS CHO Turns on while the pulses are being output by the F171 instructi PLS CH1 ete SPDH F172 PLSH F173 PWMH F174 SPOH on flag F175 SPSH and F177 HOME instructions R9122 to R912F R9130 to R913F Note1 This relay is avaialble for the FP X0 L30 L40 L60 type only 14 20 14 1 4 Table of Special Data Registers for FP X0 L14 L30 L40 L60 een Name idl ng Self diagnostic error The self diagnostic error code is stored here DT90000 code when a Self diagnostic error occurs DT90001 DT9000 DT9000 DT9000 DT9000 DT9000 DT9000
15. RS232C equipment System register settings No 412 Selection of communication mode No 413 Communication format No 415 Baud rate COM port Starting address for receive buffer For L40MR L60MR only COM port Receive buffer capacity For L4OMR L60MR only Tool port Starting address for receive buffer Tool port Receive buffer capacity No 416 No 417 No 420 No 421 Note Both the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the systerm register No 415 should be set for the COM port Note Note When using COM port FP X0 L40 L60 RS232C RS485 RS232C converter equipment Set Value General purpose serial communication Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist STX exist When using tool port 2400 bps to 115200 bps When using COM port 19200 bps 115200 bps DTO to DT8191 Default DTO O to 2048 words Default 2048 words L14R L30R DTO to DT2499 Default DTO L40R L60R DDTO to DT8191 Default DT4096 L14R LS30R 0 to 128 words Default 128 words L40R L60R 0 to 2048 words Default 2048 words 6 29 6 5 9 1 N Communication General purpose Serial Communication The FP XO and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable Using the protocol that matches the external units the F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and recei
16. S2 1 S2 D lt gt S1 82 a d D lt 81 82 at d Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in pb 31 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt 82 1 S2 ORD lt gt ro gt 31 2 5 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 poe 1 2 5 or S141 S1 S2 1 S2 ORD gt ros paaa Connects a Form A normally open contact in E 1 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in ais 1l comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the Q Available lt Not available Not available partially 14 41 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH 2a Oo _ a Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 ipang LET En bit data in SA a Stat EE for S24 1 S2 real STFe gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 1 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 number S1 lt S2 1 2 or S141 S1 gt S2 1 S2 cala STF gt S1 S2 Begins a log
17. The Modbus RTU protocol enables the communication between the PLC and other devices compatible with Modbur RTU such as our KT temperature control unit and FP e Communication is performed when the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave unit returns responses response messages according to the instructions Master function Master Slave Slave Slave FP X0 R5485 Device Device Device compatible compatible compatible with Modbus with Modbus with Modbus RTU slave RTU slave RTU slave function function function Slave function Master Device compatible Slave Slave Slave with Modbus RTU slave function FP X0 FP X0 FP X0 6 3 6 2 Communicaton Port Type 6 2 1 Tool Port This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the tool port on the control unit PinNo Signalname Abbreviation Signal direction ignal Ground eo Not used ee 5 SVT 5 V__ Unit External device Si 2 SendData SD __ Unit gt External device me 5V Unit External device 6 2 2 COM Port RS485 Port For L40MR and L60MR only Only L40MR and L60MR has a COM port Terminal Transmission line Pa Transmission line Terminal unit Pra ya l 1H YIB COM port RS485 6 4 6 3 Communication Specifications Tool Port Common to FP X0 Item Description RS232C Transmission distance Baud r
18. Transmission data AJB IC DJE F G H CrR ON OFF R9039 Execution condition RO F159 MTRN execution During transmission During this interval the F159 MTRN instruction cannot be executed ON OFF 3 When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted the S value is cleared to zero and the transmission done flag R9039 turns on When you do not wish to add the terminator end code during transmissions Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data set system register 413 to Terminator None Programming example The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator Ro HDF J 5 F159 MTRN DT100 K 8 K 1 gt os 3 Key Point Do not include the terminator end code in the transmission data The terminator is added automatically When STX exist is specified for the header start code in system register 413 do not add the header to the transmission data The header is added automatically specify K 68 6 21 6 5 4 Receiving Data Data register DT Data input from the communication port is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register and the reception done flag goes on If the reception done flag is off data can be received at any time Data reception External device Data t
19. c O O Constant 12 10 Chapter 13 Dimensions and Cable Specifications 13 1 13 1 Dimensions 13 1 1 Dimensions E Control unit Unit mm NC COM COM X1 MD K E Pui xis cow x00 K A xtc YL Y m E FP X Expansion unit Type _ Model 1 uR fe FP X0 control unit rds L40R L40MR 150 L60R L60MR FP X0 expansion E14 E16 60 unit E30 100 Unit mm H FP X0 control unit ja _N 4 FP X0 expansion 14 E16 E aa oo FF X0 control unit FP X0 expansion unit 2 M4 or 2 05 13 2 13 2 Cable Adapter Specifications 13 2 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S PC connection cable 3000 13 Mini DINS pin Male PLC side T 24994015 Socket Inch screw thread 4 40 Unit mm PL mm 500 10 1000 f L 2000 6 deo uoIpe Old 6 6 t Lb Unit mm 13 3 13 4 Chapter 14 Appendix 14 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 14 1 1 System Registers Precaution for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC 1
20. depending on the duration of the momentary power failure either one unit may be without electricity momentarily and the I O verify error may occur In that case turn off the power supply and then turn on again 5 8 3 Protection of Output Sections Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally 5 16 Chapter 6 Communication Functions 6 1 Functions and Types 6 1 1 Communication Modes and Communication Ports On the FP X0O four different communication modes are available According to the communication mode to be used the usable communication ports vary yee Usable communication port and model Communication mode Conpuceink Poe O ea j MEWTOCOL master COM port RS485 port General purpose serial communication Tool port COM port RS485 port PC PLC link COM port RS485 port MODBUS RTU COM port RS485 port 6 1 2 Computer Link Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from
21. gt D 1 D type data A 2 subtraction O Available X Not available Not available partially ik a fp abe are eye tangent PBT AN x x x x x O O operation BCD type BASIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D E a a operation BCD type BAT AN S D TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D arctangent PBATAN x x e K x operation Floating point type real number operation instructions Floating point F S2 S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D type data PF A 2 O addition Floating point F S1 S2 S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 aa e D dE multiplication Floating point F S1 S2 S1 1 1 S2 1 S2 D 1 D type data PF D 14 Ar2 0 0 C iia ll ll are PPE 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later 14 58 Ope Boo lean E Description rand Floating point type S D SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D data sine operation COS S D COS S 1 S gt D 1 D PCOS TAN S D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D PTAN pan DO SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D ACOS S D COS S 1 S gt D 1 D PACOS ATAN S D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D PATAN F315 Floating point type P315 data cosine operation Floating point type data tangent operation F317 Floating point type P317 data arcsine operation F318 Floating point type P318 data arccosine operation Floating point type data arctangent operation Floating point type data natural logarithm Floatin
22. 1 Restrictions on the number of writing Writing can be performed within 10000 times If writing continues for more than that the correct operation cannot be guaranteed 2 1 he power supply turns off when the P13 PICWT instruction is being executed If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed the hold type area may not be kept Also when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode the same event may occur 9 8 Chapter 10 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 10 1 10 1 Self Diagnostic function 10 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition How to read status indicator LEDs on control unit PON ER RO ERR eee Operation Description status Aton on fot Nowa operation PROG Mode Normal Light on Off LED does not flash even if the forcing condition output is performed in program mode Forcing input output in Run mode ne ne a Light o Self Io error Operation stops Conatan Light on Light o a System watchdog timer has been S top or off or off on activated 10 1 2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs Normally when an error occurs the operation stops However the operation can be continued by setting the system registers for some errors PLC System Register setting menu on programming tool software To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs select PLC System Register setting under Option on the menu bar and click
23. 14 47 FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP10SH F94 P94 16 bit data distribute DIST S n D Each of the digits of the data of S are stored in distributed to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at D Twelve characters of the character s 15 Ope mera Boolean p Description rand T Character ASCII code O 5 constants of S are converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 16 bit table data The data of S1 is searched for in the G ala search S1 S2 areas in the range S2 to S3 and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038 32 bit table data The data of S1 1 S1 is searched search for in the 32 bit data designated by 11 S1 S2 S3 S3 beginning from S2 and the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038 u O UM U p u Un oD gt o ov VO no D ao O O V TI V T O oO O NN 0O O O e e ee Data shift instructions Data table shift out and compress data between D1 and D2 that are 0 i are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are 0 7 x D1 D2 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of the z 7 o gg I 3 J O Q NO Data table shift in and compress S D1 P99 y O v are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 N Shifts the n bits of D to the righ
24. Allocation of timers and counters System registers 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 2 Hold non hold type setting System registers 6 to 14 For L40 and L60 types only When these registers are set to hold type the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values will be cleared to 0 3 Operation mode setting on error System registers 20 23 and 26 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 4 Time settings System registers 31 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 5 MEWNET W0 PC PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET W0O PC PLC link communication Note The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 6 Input settings System registers 400 to 405 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function 7 Tool and COM ports communication settings System registers 410 to 415 420 421 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM ports are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and mode
25. CH3 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter gt For L14 L30 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter gt For L40 L60 Description Do not set input XO as high speed counter Two phase input X0 X1 Two phase input X0 X1 Reset input X4 Incremental input X0 Incremental input X0 Reset input X4 Decremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Reset input X4 Individual input XO X1 Individual input X0 X1 Reset input X4 Incremental decremental control input XO X1 Incremental decremental control input XO X1 Reset input X4 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Incremental input X1 Reset input X5 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X5 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter Two phase input X2 X3 Two phase input X2 X3 Reset input X6 Incremental input X2 Incremental input X2 Reset input X6 Decremental input X2 Decremental input X2 Reset input X6 Individual input X2 X3 Individual input X2 X3 Reset input X6 Incremental decremental control input X2 X3 Incremental decremental control input X2 X3 Reset input X6 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter gt For L14 L30 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter gt For L40 L60 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 Reset input X7 Decremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Reset input X7 Note1 When the operation mode is 2 p
26. Controli AFPX L40R 350 mA or less 220 mA or less PSE AFPX L40MR 350 mA or less 220 mA or less AFPX L60R 390 mA or less 250 mA or less AFPX L60MR 390 mA or less 250 mA or less AFPX E16R 65 mA or less 40 mA or less AFPX E30R 310 mA or less 210 mA or less AFPX E16T 20 mA or less 10 mA or less Se ee aye ae AFPX E16P 30 mA or less 15 mA or less p AFPX E30T 345 mA or less 220 mA or less AFPX E30P 350 mA or less 225 mA or less AFPX E16X 20 mA or less 10 mA or less AFPX E14YR 75 mA or less 40 mA or less Programmable display oo type 25 mA or less 15 mA or less Note1 These current consumption indicate the increased amount of the current consumption of the c c control unit Note2 The current consumption of E30 is the current consumption at the supply terminal of E30 The current consumption of the control unit does not increase 12 3 12 1 2 Performance Specifications L60 30 points 40 points 60 points DC input 16 DC input 24 DC input 32 14 points No of Control unit DC input 8 contro Ry output 4 Ry output 10 Ry output 12 Ry output 24 Tr output 2 Tr output 4 Tr output 4 Tr output 4 llabl When using E16R Max 88 points Max 108 points oiie expansion I O units Max 3 units Max 3 units p When using E30R Max 130 points Max 150 points expansion O units up to 3 units up to 3 units Programming method Control l Relay symbol Cyclic operation Bu
27. FP X E16 Expansion Unit Ver 3 Can be installed at any position within the FP X E16T Expansion Unit Ver 3 limits described in the above figure FP X E16P Expansion Unit Ver 3 FP X E14YR Expansion Unit The expnasion units of group B do not have FP X E16R Expansion Unit a built in circuit to supply bus power to the FP X E16X Expansion Unit Ver 2 or older expansion unit installed on the right FP X FP X E16T Expansion Unit Ver 2 or older E16 E14 expansion units cannot be installed FP X E16P Expansion Uni t Ver 2 or older on the right hand side of those units Up to eight units of FP X can be connected however the restrictions on each expansion unit vary For AFPX E16 E14 Two units cannot be connected consecutively since the power should be supplied from the unit with the power supply as no power supply is built in AFPX E16 E16 expansion I O unit cannot be connected on the right side of the control unit or AFPX ES30 For AFPX E30 There is no restriction on AFPX E30 so that up to 8 units can be connected consecutively The total length of the expansion cable should be within 160 cm 1 4 E Note Restrictions on installing AFPX E16 E14 Target models FP X E14YR expansion unit FP X E16R expansion unit Fp X 16X expansion unit Ver 2 or older FP X E16T expansion unit Ver 2 or older FP X E16P expansion unit Ver 2 or older TAGZQQLALAQLLQLLQAQALLAQLQLAAT ClERLLQEA C1EAQLRAET CORQQLQLQQQLE iz DOOQOOQHOOO
28. Match case Operation Mode Access Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric pokok m Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 2 Click the Force Cancel button A confirmation message is displayed 3 Confirm the message and click the OK button If the current status is Password is not set this procedure has completed All programs and security information were deleted PLC Home Settings Current status Password is not set Close Available retry counts 3 counts digit number Help C 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case m Operation Mode Access Protect C Unprotect m 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric okoko Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 8 2 Upload Protection 8 2 1 Upload Protection Overview of program upload protection function This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program uploading If the upload protection is set note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disabled to be uploaded after that Transferring programs to the FP memory loader will be also unperformable The setting can be cancelled using the programming tool however all ladder programs system regis
29. No 3 No 4 Range of link registers used Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size 40 48 Jlo Note No 51 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other units IES Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 6 37 Partial use of link areas In the link areas available for PC PLC link link relays with a total of 1024 points 64 words and link registers with a total of 128 words can be used This does not mean however that it is necessary to reserve the entire area Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers Link relay allocation No Name Nw Receive area Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size With the above settings the 14 words 224 points consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays Used 50 Not used internal rel
30. Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later FPO FP e EEEE LN N S 1 S gt D 1 D PLN FP2SH FP10SH 14 59 Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point Floating point type data round ding the Floating point type data absolute FABS S D PFABS RAD S D PRAD Floating point type FCMP S1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A on data compare PFCMP S1 1 S1 S82 1 S2 gt R900B on 10 141 1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on Floating point type data degree gt radian Floating point type data radian gt degree Floating point type data band compare FWIN S1 PFWIN S2 S3 Available X Not available Not available partially FPO FP e Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign roundin
31. R9014 ype P been started and goes on for the second and subsequent relay scans Step ladder initial pulse Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at relay on type the step ladder control R9016 Notused e O R9017 Notused e O R9018 0 01 s clock pulse relay apr operations MOH 0 01 s i i a R9019 0 02 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s YT LJ cycles oD i i a R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s YT LJ cycles MoT i i a a R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s I cycles KEFY Repeats on off operations in 1 s Lf R901 1 s clock pul EEN Repeats on off operations in 2 s I R901D 2 s clock pul Repeats on off operations in 1 min OO 1 min clock pulse relay cycles i 1 min 14 12 WR902_ FP X0 Address Name s Description _ _ _ Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG eee HAN MOdE Nag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9024 Notused _ e O R9026 O flag e on while the F149 MSG instruction is executed see ff f R9029 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay timer counter contacts Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by R902A Interrupt enable flag the ICTL instruction R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs Sampling by the instruction 0 Ave Sampe pomt pag Sampling a
32. S141 S1 gt S34 1 S3 S1 1 P286 lower limit PDLIMT S3 D S1 gt D 1 D control When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S2 1 32 bit data S2 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 gt D 1 D F287 Deadband BAND S1 S2 When S1 gt S3 S3 S1 D P287 control PBAND S3 D When S2 lt S3 S3 S2 D 16 bit data When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 0 gt D F288 Deadband DBAND S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S34 1 S3 S3 1 P288 control PDBAND S3 D S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When 1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 D 1 D F289 Zone control Prone 53 S2 When S3 lt 0 3 S1 D P289 16 bit data S3 D When S3 0 0 gt D When S3 gt 0 S3 S2 D F290 Zone control S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 S3 1 P290 32 bit data PDZONE S3 D S3 S1 1 S 1 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D BCD type real number operation instructions F300 eee BSIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D ale BCD type BCOS COS 1 1 S1 D 1 D cosine PBCOS x x x xX x o operation F304 BCD type BACOS S D COS S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D P304 arccosine PBACOS x x x X xX O O operation F309 Floating point FMV S D S 1 S gt D 1 D io P309 type data move PFMV Floating point S2 S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2
33. SET RST or data transfer functions the output obtained at the I O update is determined by the final results of the operation lt Example gt Output to the same output relay YO with OT KP SET and RST instructions XO YO e YO ON x1 YO s gt YO ON X 2 YO R gt YO OFF When XO to X2 are all on YO is output as off at I O update If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress use a partial I O update instruction F143 11 2 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method 11 2 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method Instructions using the leading edge detection operation DF leading edge differential instruction Count input for CT counter instruction Count input for F118 UCD up down counter instruction Shift input for SR shift register instruction Shift input for F119 LRSR left right shift register instruction NSTP next step instruction Differential execution type high level instruction P13 NO of OD Leading edge detection method An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger execution condition is detected switching from off to on 1 Standard operation Trigger Operation of instruction TEENE Executed every scan ON OFF 2 Leading edge detection operation i ON Trigger M OFF Operation of ON instruction OFF Executed only one time How to perform
34. Searches the maximum value in the P270 word data 16 S2 D word data table between the S1 and bit S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 Searches for the minimum value in the S2 D word data table between the area F271 Maximum value DMAX S1 Searches for the maximum value in the P271 double word PDMAX S2 D double word data table between the data 32 bit area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative S1 selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 to S1 is stored in D 2 F272 Minimum value P272 word data 16 bit is stored in D 1 F273 Minimum value S1 Searches for the minimum value in the P273 double word S2 D double word data table between the data 32 bit area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F275 Total and mean S1 The total value and the mean value of P275 values word S2 D the word data with sign from the area data 16 bit selected with S1 to S2 are obtained and stored in the D F276 DMEAN S1 The total value and the mean value of P276 PDMEAN S2 D the double word data with sign from the area selected with S1 to S2 are i obtained and stored in the D F277 Sort word
35. Terminator CR Header STX not exist Note The settings of the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No 415 should be the same 6 34 6 6 4 Link Area Allocation The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC PLC link are allocated in the link area of the CPU unit Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit System registers at O O Ta value Range of link relays used for PC PLC link O0 Oto64words Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link O0 Oto 128 words 42 Starting number for link relay transmission Of Oto6S 43 Link relay transmission size O _ Oto64words 44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 Oto127 45 Link data register transmission size O _ Oto127words 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half 47 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 1 to 16 0 PC PLC link 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half 50 Range of link relays used for PC PLC link O Oto64words 5 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 Oto128words 53 Link relay transmission size O Oto64words O0 Oto 127 words 57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 1 to 16 PC PLC link Note The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC PLC link Link area
36. button Force Cancel with FPWIN GR Select Release the upload protection by compulsion in the Upload settings dialog box and press the Execute button 8 8 8 3 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader 8 3 1 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader The following two functions of the FP memory loader AFP8670 AFP8671 can be set Limited distribution function Programs can be downloaded only to the units which the same password has been set When downloading a program from the memory loader the program can be downloaded only when the program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled FP memory loader E Program Password 01234567 Limited distribution function ON ra f 7 F j N Z i b password 01234567 Password abcdefgh 4 A Y Upload protection setting function If this function is valid the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader FP memory loader j Program A Password 01234567 A B Upload protection function ON Program A Password 01234567 Upload is prohibited FP memory loader 8 9 8 3 2 Setting Method Setting with FPWIN GR 1 Select Online gt Online Edit Mode in the menu bar and press the CTRL and F2 keys The screen is switched to Online Monitor 2 Select Tool gt Set PLC Pass
37. control Comparison of software specifications O o y oten ABO S L4AO L6O LAOM LEOM Up to 3000 steps From 0 08us step by basic instruction From 0 08us step From 0 32us MV instruction by basic instruction by high level instruction From 0 32us MV instruction From 3001 steps by high level instruction From 0 58us step by basic instruction From 1 62us MV instruction by high level instruction Operation enon Simultaneous rewriting capacity during RUN Max 128 steps Max 512 steps Sampling trace Available Note1 The PLC link function is available for L40M and L60M types IV Arithmetic processing speed Before You Start Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing Keep the height below 2000m For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas E xcessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that w
38. data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301 Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value X7 l Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed HDF F1 DMV K3000 DT90300 counter Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X7 Read the elapsed value of the high speed counter DF F1 DMV DT90300 DT100 and copies it to DT100 and DT101 er note The elapsed value area varies during scanning Replace it with an arbitrary data register at the beginning of the program as necessary in cases such as using it several times in the program Target value match ON instruction F166 Example 1 XA If the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 for DF F166 HC1S KO K10000 Y7 channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on Example 2 XB lf the elapsed value DT90308 and DT90309 for DF F166 HC1S K2 K20000 Y6 channel 2 matches K20000 output Y6 turns on Target value match OFF instruction F167 Example 1 XC i If the elapsed value DT90304 and DT90305 for HDF F167 HC1R K1 K30000 Y4 channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns off Example 2 XD i If the elapsed value DT90312 and DT90313 for HDF F167 HC1R K3 K40000 Y5 channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off 7 10 Input pulse measurement instruction F178 For L40 and L60 types only This instruction is used to measure the pulse number and cycle of a specified high speed
39. tion No 8 System regis eee or 16 ter 44 and 45 System regis a ter 46 and 47 DT90252 to DT90291 14 32 set as it Is Also the system registers 40 to 45 corresponding to other units will be changed to the values which the received values are corrected and the registers 46 and 57 in the home unit are set for the registers 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings partaining to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below lt Example gt when DT90219 is 0 Higher byte Lower byte DT90220 to DT90243 Unit Station No 1 Setting contents of system register 40 42 44 and 46 Setting contents of system register 41 43 45 and 47 e When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the standard setting the A N A values in the home unit are copied in the system registers 46 and 47 When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the reverse setting the registers 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home unit mentioned in the left column will be changed to 50 to 55 and 57 and the system register 46 will be A Available N A Not available rte Read Writ A Counting area for input X0 or Pip 0S0O APSEG XO X1 of the main unit A Noten A DT90301 Higher words HSC CHO The target value is set when A Pee anger instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed A DT90303 Higher words en ais RAER for input X1 of A DT
40. 001 seconds timer contact a is set to on ajala A n After set value n x 0 01 seconds ee contact a is set to on E ae Sa Pol eS i in set value n x 0 1 seconds O O 0 0 O mix timer contact a is set to on afell 3 Sels x 1 second timer O contact a is set to on HHE HUR Auxiliary timer F137 yYRLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds H Hewswrs oH Hlthe specified output and R900D are eje FP2SH FP10SH T C 5 FP0O FP e ofofe rm FP polo Fx E EJ o ES i E9 After set value n vace After set value S x 0 01 seconds i HeEwsosm s oH H the specified output and R900D are Time constant Executes the filter processing for the HFIRA mssi roi i x x processing specified input a 4 a Decrements from the preset value n Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models 3 Any device can be set for the setting value of the counter or timer instruction As for FP X Ver 2 0 or later only 3 4 4 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when Y1280 R1120 including special internal relay or L1280 is specified by KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay numb
41. 01 from the communication port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 H F146 RECV DT 100 DTO KO DT 60 7 FO MV HO WRO Flowchart Data initialization DT50 and DT51 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 YES Increments DT50 and DT51 sends a data write command Completion sends a data Execute F145 read command Execute F146 SEND instruction RECV instruction Turns RO off With the above program the procedures 1 to 3 are executed repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM port 3 Reads the DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM port 6 16 6 5 General purpose Serial Communication 6 5 1 Overview In general purpose serial communication data is sent and received over the communication port to and from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the communication port by means of PLC programs and data registers Image processing device Data is sent by transferring the data to Data register DT a data register and then transmitting it fA using the F159 MTRN instruction lt ia E
42. 60 words 110 words aor wy Internal relay 64 words 256 words 128 words Code for specifying 16 link rela points as one word 16 biis of data Data register 2500 words 8192 words revoi This is a shared data memory which is Link register Note2 LD used within the PLC link Data is LDO to LD255 handled in 16 bit units one word Timer Counter set value area Note2 SV Timer Couner elapsed value area EV gt S oc D hom gt ho o D Special data register DT Index register I 1024 words SVO to SV1023 256 words SVO to SV255 1024 words EVO to EV1023 256 words EVO to EV255 420 words DT90000 to DT90419 14 words 10 to ID 420 words DT90000 to DT90419 14 words 10 to ID Data memory for storing a target value of a timer and setting value of a counter Stores by timer counter number Data memory for storing the elapsed value during operation of a timer counter Stores by timer counter number Data memory for storing specific data Various settings and error codes are stored Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier 12 9 Number of points and range of memory area available for use Function L14 L30 L40 L60 Master control L14 L30 32 points relay points MCR MC L40 L60 256 points No of labels LBL L40 L60 256 points No of step L14 L80 128 stages ladders SSTP L40 L60 100
43. 8 digit password is set and Allow the download in case of same password is set x 8 digit password is set O O and Note1 Note1 Set that PLC cannot be uploaded is set X 8 digit password is set and Allow the download in case of same x xX password is set Note2 Note1 and Set that PLC cannot be uploaded is set Download possible Download possible only for models with the same password x Download impossible Note1 The upload protection setting is not available in FP memory loader Ver1 Note2 Although programs cannot be downloaded with FP memory loader Ver 2 or later only the upload protection setting is activated Status of PLC that program has been downloaded When downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader the password that has been already set on the unit may be changed Note the followings 8 digit password protected aia Limited distribution setting Off The password will be overwritten with a new 8 digit password 8 digit password setting The password will not change Limited distribution setting On The program itself will not be downloaded 8 4 Table of Security Settings Cancel For the settings on the FPOR control unit Status of security set protection password password Upload protection A A A 4 digitpassword A A _ NA Sets Cancels iii A Available N A Not available 8 12 Chapter 9 Other Functions 9 1 Clo
44. DT12 X A D value Note In DTO specify the value of paired data 2 4 5 Voltage input Connect the output line of a device to the analog input connector externally to perform voltage input Circuit diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Do not connect anything with the 1 2 pin o oO ji Voltage input value and digital conversion value Use the following formula to convert the voltage input value and digital conversion value Digital conversion value 1 Voltage input value V _____ x 10 1012 Example When digital conversion value is K900 K900 1 Voltage input value V _ x 10 8 80V 1012 Input impedance Approx 1MQ 2 5 Terminal Layout AFPXO0L14R AC power supply terminal Input DC input terminals pee Transistor output Relay output terminals terminals AFPXOL30R AC power supply terminals Input DC input terminals P l A AI e e e k a a o lt Jl 5 o Q Q a e B Q Q EE oom xt 93 x6 27 pe 38 x0 EA com ce ee A e e a _Yo Y2 co Y5 Y7 c1 c2 YB YD Tee BERTON IEEE aa power 7 Relay output terminals supply terminals for input output Transistor output terminals Note Do not connect the service power supply terminals for input and other DC power supply in parallel AFPXOL40R AC power supply terminals Input DC input terminals Ld Not used Transistor output terminals Relay ou
45. DT90010 DT90011 DT90012 DT90013 DT90014 DT90015 DT90016 DT90017 DT90018 g j O OINIO OJOJAJIOJN pr90005 Not used f Extension I O verify error unit gt lt gt Operation auxiliary register for data shift instruction Operation auxiliary register for division instruction Operation error address hold type Operation error address non hold type A Available N A Not available Writ ing N A Sel Sl eel ee ee S S S S S S S S gt When the state of installation of FP X0 expansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary display 15 11 7654321 O itNo N A 765432 1 O Unit No on 1 error off 0 normal gt eee al ee ae S S S S S S S S gt gt lt gt One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction F105 BSR or F106 BSL is executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT90015 when the division instruction F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT90015 and DT90016 when the division instruction F33 D or F53 DB is executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction Z After commencing operation the address where the first ope
46. FP X ERROR ALARM Flashes continually lit Screen display Continually lit m Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of error and the address where the err
47. FPZ FPOR FPOR mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then Stops turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then AJAJAJA AJAJAJA turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one A unit which cannot be installed on the slave station of the MEWNET F link system is installed on the slave station Remove the illegal unit from the slave station The number of slots or I O points used for MEW NET F remote I O system exceeds the remote I O limitation limitation Re configure the system so that the number of slots and I O points is within the specified range I O overlap or I O setting that is over the range is detected in the allocated I O and MEWNET F I O map Re configure the I O map correctly TANN i i a ee oe E O E E o a E Co o T S T gt S S gt S gt S S _ E a a E __ A Available 14 68 Opera tion Description and steps to take status I O mapping for remote I O terminal MEWNET F l slave I O a e i I O terminal units and I O link terminal Stops Re configure the I O map for slave stations mapping error according to the I O points of the slave stations When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program
48. General purpose serial ee communication communication et hee a fe Modem Initialization Modem Initialization Usable function MEW TOCOL master slave 2k bytes frame General purpose communication MODBUS RTU master slave PLC link Modem initialization Usable function RS485 port Comparison of high speed counter and pulse output specifications Single phase 4 chs or Single phase 4 chs or 2 phase 2 chs 2 phase 2 chs Single phase Max 20 kHz Single phase Max 50 kHz 2 phase Max 20 kHz 2 phase Max 20 kHz Max 1 ch Max 2 chs Pulse output Pulse output Max 2 chs Pulse output PWM output Max 20 kHz Max 20 kHz Pulse output Max 50 kHz PWM output PWM output PWM output Max 3 kHz Max 1 6 kHz Max 1 6 kHz F171 SPDH Acceleration time and deceleration time can be set Same as on the left individually Target speed cannot be changed after the execution F172 PLSH JOG Acceleration time and operation deceleration time can be set Same as on the left Related individually Target speed cannot instructions be changed after the execution F177 HOME Home return Deviation counter signal cannot F177 HOME be used for L14 type interpolation PWM output F173 PWMH Same as on the left Input pulse Not available F178 PLSM Note1 Typical specifications are described here For the details of the restrictions on combinations refer to Chapter 7 High speed counter Trapezoidal
49. Link system error Unit No overlap Link system error Transmission format error Link unit hardware l Link system error error Link system error 127 Link system error Link system error Link system error Link system error Transmission i Link system error impossible error Communication stop Link system error No destination error Link system error Other communication i Link system error error 140 BCCerrr A transfer error occurred in the received data 141 Formaterror gt A command was received that does not fit the format 142 No support error A command was received that is not supported e te procedure error frames 0 unceeting ror Miner by olga ho anamissonabon oo Link setting error l eae l number by designating the transmission Station eam iapa ee a time out error buffer is congested eae Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link error unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame Busy error processing Or cannot be received because command being processed is congested 160 Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number Data error i l i i designation size designation range or format designation Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration PC command that
50. Load current at 15 mA or more External power supply Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC and terminals Current 15 mA or less Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Circuit diagram terminal Output terminal External power supply 24 V DC Power supply of load 5 to 24 V DC terminal Internal circuit Output circuit Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points No limitation 2 6 2 3 3 Output Specifications L14 From Y2 L30 L40 L60 From Y4 Pp iem Desoripion O Insulation method Relay insulation Output type 1a output Relay cannot be replaced Rated control aa 0 2A 250V AC 2A 30 V DC per point Resistance load 1 point common x 2 2 points common x 1 L14 2 points common x 1 4 points common x 2 L30 1 point common x 2 2 points common x 1 4 points common x 2 L40 4 points common x 6 L60 Approx 10 ms Approx 8 ms 20 million times or more Frequency of switching 180 times min Lifetime 100 thousand times or more Frequency of switching at the rated control capacity 20 times min Surge absorber None Operating mode indicator LED display Note There are restrictions on the rated current for each output block Each usable rated current is as below L14 Y2 to Y5 4 points Max 6A in total L30 Y4 to YD 10 points Max 8A in total L40 Y4 to YFD 12 points Max 8A in total L60 Y4 to YB 8 points Max 8A in total YC to Y1B 16 points Max 8
51. OK 10 Comment Size 100000P Rest 100000 P Block Comment K 5O00L Rest 5000 L Remark Size lt 5000P Rest 5000 P PLE Connection PLC Type FPOR 16K Station gt Home Version 1 06 Scan Time 0 4 msec Condition Normal Min 0 3 msec REMOTE PROG Max 7 7 msec PLC Mode Flag RUN Mode 0 TEST Mode 0 Break Mode gt D 0 0 PLC Mode PLC Error Flag Self 1 O Verifi Wolt Dip 0 BattemErm 120 Error 0 fHold Advance Unit g Ope Er Break Enable Force flaq Self Diagnosis Error Message OUT Refresh STEP RUN Message Remote External El Clear Error 170 Error Advn Err Verifi Err Operation Err PC link We link VE link Help lf the error is an operation error the error address can be confirmed in this dialog box After correcting the error click on the Clear Error button to clear the error To display the status display dialog box again select Status Display under Online on the menu bar Eror Code 45 Operation Error Occurred Note The above screen shows the case when using the FPOR Procedure 2 lt For error code is 1 to 9 gt Condition There is a syntax error in the program Operation 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Operation 2 Execute a total check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error lt For error code is 20 or higher gt Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax
52. Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only E Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental 1 Absolute E Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 2 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 1 28 7 4 10 Data Table Control Instruction F174 Pulses are output from the specified channel according to the specified data table Positioning is performed sequentially according to the values of data tables and stops at the data table that the value of pulse output stop KO is written When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed Example of timing chart Frequency KHz 2 9KHZ 1kHz 1000 4000 9000 ae Elapsed value Movement amount Positioning operation start R10 Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Data table paia Setting item Unit amp eor Settable range register No sample program H1000 0010 DT100 Ganclesda Absol t D e to the control code on the CW CCW pens DT102 Frequency 1 Hz K1000 D1104 Target value 1 pulses K1000 Set frequencies in the following range K2500 K1 to K20000 L14 L30 type K4000 K1 to K50000 L40 L60 type Set target values in the following range K1000 K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Drie lend of table 1 1 29 Sample program R400 R9120 R402 R400 R400 R401 HoF _ A R401 F1 DMV 10000010 DT400 Control code H100000
53. P An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For Parameter example the number setting in a program does mismatch Stops not agree with the timer counter range setting error Change to PROG mode check the system to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area A Available Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue 14 65 14 66 Compile memory full error High level Instruction type error High level instruction operand combina tion error Description and steps to take The program is too large to compile in the program memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program FP10SH If memory expansion is possible compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are programmed using the same trigger continuously gt Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combinat
54. Sampling Ti 1000 Ti 100 1000 ampling Times imes Help Sampling Rate Every SMPL instruction fi 00 msec 10 30000 Delay Times fi 00 Times 1 999 3 Start monitoring Start with the Fiil button 9 5 2 Sampling by instruction 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to TRACE Set the sampling rate time to 0 Mode TRACE OF Cancel Sampling Times foon Times 100 1000 Te Help fi g meec 10 amw Delay Times 100 Times 1 999 3 Read data by trigger 1 Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2 on the time chart display of FRPWIN GR The data will be indicated in the time chart Stop monitoring Stop with the button stop by the Trigger Break in the menu or stop by the F156 instruction FPWIN GR Ea 7 Read Trace data Sure Read Sample Trace Window Reading sample trace data Please waittor a while HERREREE 9 3 Time Constant Processing The input time constants for 16 points of the CPU input X0 to XF can be set by the system registers 430 to 437 If this setting is specified an operation like the equivalent circuit below will be performed By the setting the noises or chattering of input will be removed CXn Input signal of Xn contact Xn I
55. X Regardless of the state of the input from the input device forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure B At this time the input LED will not blink however the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten As for contacts not specified the on off state will be read according to the input status from the input device 2 Processing of external output Y Regardless of the state of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure A At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcibly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result 3 Processing of Timer T and Counter C Regardless of the timer counter input condition forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output At this time the contact of the timer T or counter C in the operation memory will be rewritten Timing and counting will not take place during control The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Operation during operation For small sized PLCs FPO FPOR FP and FP X The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is re
56. a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS instruction read stack RDS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction lt Example 1 gt When X1 was on prior to XO YO will not be on even if XO becomes on x0 X1 ones YO an H DF Em X2 lt Example 2 gt TMX5 will activate if X1 becomes on regardless of whether XO is on or off ANS XO X1 r TMX 5 K30 YO a X2 lt Example 3 gt When X2 was on prior to X0 Y1 will not be on even if X0 becomes on PSHS XO X1 YO m X2 Y1 H DF X2 f RDS VA POPS Examples in which the above programs are rewritten correctly lt Program in which the example 1 is rewritten gt XO X1 YO H HOF xO X2 m lt Program in which the example 2 is rewritten gt XO X1 TMX5 K 30 YO nH XO X2 m lt Program in which the example 3 is rewritten gt XO X1 YO e Fk XO X2 Y1 e HOF kK XO X3 E 11 4 Rewrite Function During RUN 11 4 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN How operation of rewrite during RUN is performed Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode When a rewrite is attempted during RUN the tool service time is temporarily extended program rewriting is performed and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode For this reason the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms
57. be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Service Power Supply for Input Output AC power supply type only Specifications Rated output voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated output current 0 4 A Overcurrent protection l Available function N Terminal screw Note This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected it may lead to damages DC Power Supply Specifications Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC 12 A or less at 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms Internal power supply part Guaranteed life Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation M3 20 000 hours at 55 C 3 3 3 1 3 Input and output specifications Input specifications es ee Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated input current Approx 4 3 mA 16 points common Input points per common Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current Max off voltage Max off current input impedance fei aes Operating mode indicator Circuit diagram Internal circuit E 2 OME R1 5 6kQ R2 1 KQ Relay output specifications Insulation method Output type Rated control capacity 8 A or less common Output p
58. cannot be processed was executed during RUN PC mode error made Link system error 14 74 External memory error Protect error Address error No program error and No data error Rewrite during RUN error 167 17 171 Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when the protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data Also when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an instruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 0 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same control error time as a comma
59. comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in fp 5s parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in pF 82 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit datain the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in _ s 2 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 O Available X Not available Not available partially 14 40 FPO FP e cre eee ttt T N A T N A ma 32 bit data S1 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 o LA L pr teL bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 pm te S241 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 _ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S24 1 S2 STD gt Nr 8189 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 _ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S24 1 S2 or S14 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 STD lt Le 1 825 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit
60. comparing two 16 gt 1 924 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 82 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 s olofo olofolo bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Spf a Tes mpe Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 E 771E L bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact p5 8152 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact p 8 S2 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact fp 882 5 Iserially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact pf 51 52 Iserially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact f 5452 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact _f 551 52 Iserially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in p755 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the
61. configuration word word For PC L for 1024 points 1st half For PC LD for 127 words 1st half link O link O is Aa L for 1024 points 2nd half i Mi LD for 127 words 2nd half in in For link relay For link register Link areas consist of link relays and link registers and are divided into areas for PC PLC link 0 and PC PLC link 1 and used with those units The link relay which can be used in an area for either PC PLC link 0 or PC PLC link 1 is maximum 1024 points 64 words and the link register is maximum 128 words Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 6 35 Example of allocation The areas for PC PLC link are divided into send areas and receive areas The link relays and link registers are sent from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC Link relays and link registers with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving side For PC PLC link 0 Link relay allocation Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 WLO WLO 55 Receive area Receive area Sendareq p 63 System registers No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission o l2 l4o lo Link relay tr
62. contents 1 Function code error 2 Device number error out of range 3 Device quantity error out of range Reception done judgment time The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned below has passed after the final data was received Reception done judgment time 19200 Approx 1 7 ms 115200 Approx 0 3 ms Note The reception done judgment time is an approx 32 bit time 6 47 Supported commands xecutaple Name MODBUS Remarks instructions for i Ae Name for FPOR master decimal original Reference No F146 RECV Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils F146 RECV Read Input Status Read X Input F146 RECV Read Holding Registers Read DT F146 RECV Read Input Registers Read WL and LD F145 SEND Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 5 i 2 Cannot be issued Loopback Test SEND 1 Force Multiple Coils Write Multiple Ys and Rs F145 Words Cannot be issued 2 Cannot be issued Table for MODBUS reference No and FP X0 device No MODBUS reference No araon SUS PLC device No hexadecimal Coil 000001 001760 0000 06DF Y0 Y109F 002049 006144 0800 17FF RO R255F F145 SEND Preset Single Register Write DT 1 Word Daa 4 0X 1X 4X X OX X 0X 4X 4 Holding register 400001 408191 0000 1 FFF DTO DT8191 ran 300001 300128 0000 007F WLO WL127 put reg 302001 302256 07D0 08CF LDO LD255 100001 101760 0000 06DF X0 X109F 6 48 6 7 2 Settin
63. counter channel when using the high speed counter function The pulse number to be measured is counted in a specified counting cycle The one pulse on off cycle right after the execution of the instruction is measured as the pulse cycle Note The last numbers of the actual measured values may vary due to the measurement error R9013 Fo mv H 6310 DT100 7 Setting conditions Channel No 0 Fo mv K 100 DT 100 Storage location of measured pulse number R3 DT200 DT201 F178 PLSM DT 100 DT101 DT 200 No of moving average of measured pulse number Once Measurement cycle of measured pulse number 100ms Pulse cycle measurement by 1s and 1 ms Storage location of measured pulse cycle 1 us unit DT202 to DT203 Storage location of measured pulse cycle 1 ms unit DT204 to DT205 Measurement limit of measured pulse cycle 1ms unit 2s Operation of F178 instruction In case of the above sample program Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction execution execution execution execution Scan wea Scan time Scan time _ 4 Scan time _ SEEE pulse number is stored in DT200 and DT201 Cycle of counting pulse number hs between 1 ms and 5 sin dli i High speed counter ial I ne fT 7 7 l CHO Input pulse tt E i J a i Time When no pulse is measured Measured Measured Measured for 174 7 ms or more 1 Is pulse cycle pulse cycle pulse cycle
64. data SORT S1 The word data with sign from the area P277 16 bit PSORT S2 S3 specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F278 Sort double DSORT The double word data with sign from the P278 word data 32 PDSORT area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted bit in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F282 Scaling of SCAL The output value Y is found for the input P282 16 bit data PSCAL value X by performing scaling for the given data table F283 Scaling of DSCAL The output value Y is found for the input P283 32 bit data PDSCAL value X by performing scaling for the 10 given data table F284 inclination Executes the linear output for the P284 output of 16 bit specified time from the specified initial 10 data S3 D value to the target value 0 Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 When S1 gt 83 S1 D P285 lower limit PLIMT S2 When S1 lt S3 S2 D i control S3 D When S1t lt or S3 lt or S2 S3 gt D 16 bit data Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 14 57 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH al F286 Upper and DLIMT S1 S2 When
65. data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S24 1 S2 STD lt eos 61 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 aa bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 82 1 S2 32 bit data poe sisa Connects a Form A normally open contact 7 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the compare comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 AND ANDe gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact p0 5152 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact o gt 21 9 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L L comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ANDe Connects a Form A normally open contact po 5152 5 Iserially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 AND lt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 32 bit data aaa Connects a Form A normally open contact in poe 5 5 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1
66. error has occurred Operation Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error lt For error code is 42 1 gt Condition The expansion unit that had been connected when the power supply of the control unit was turned on is disconnected or the expansion unit has powered off Operation 1 Turn off the power supply of the control unit and connect the expansion unit and add on cassette Operation 2 Turn on the power supply of the expansion unit 10 3 lt For error code is 42 2 gt Condition A temporary blackout such as a momentary power off occurred and the power supply of the expansion unit was turned off Operation 1 Once the power supply of the expansion unit is restored the control unit will be automatically reset and restarted lt For error code is 43 gt Using FPWIN GR Click on the Clear Error button in the Status display dialog box Error code 43 and higher can be cleared Inthe PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data will be cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR 3 Key Point When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens click on the Operation Err button in the Status display dialo
67. executed When executing the deceleration stop with the pulse output control instruction FO the operations being executed with various instructions will be cancelled and the deceleration operation will start When the deceleration stop request flag bit 5 of DT90052 is on instructions cannot be executed As for the data table control instruction F174 the operation is similar to that of the emergency stop After the execution of the emergency stop or deceleration stop pulses are not output unless the execution condition of each pulse output instruction F171 to F177 changes from OFF to ON Specification of initial speed and speed error Common to F171 F172 F174 F175 F177 Note that there are the following characteristics according to the initial soeed specified with each instruction 1 When the initial speed is 1 Hz or higher and lower than 46 Hz the control can be performed up to 10 kHz 2 When the initial speed is 46 Hz or higher and lower than 184 Hz the control can be performed up to the maximum frequency 3 When the initial soeed is 184 Hz or higher the control can be performed up to the maximum frequency The speed error will be smallest Control code and quick start Common to F171 F172 F175 When Calculation only is specified in the digit to set the output of the control code of each instruction the pulse output is not performed Instructions can be quickly started when executing them for the same c
68. for the PLC will be turned off If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected and the overloaded status continues it may lead to damages 2 4 2 3 Input Output Specifications 2 3 1 Input Specifications po ttem ieseription Y Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4V DC XO to X3 Approx 3 5 mA Rated input current Approx 4 3 mA 8 points common L14R 16 points common L30R 24 points common L40R 16 points common x 2 L60R Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current Max off current ox hohe input 1 ms or less nee rows to X3 high speed counter pulse catch interrupt nput Arn Response time 25 us or less L14 L30 10 us or less L40 L60 a Operating mode indicator LED display Note This specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 C Input points per common Circuit diagram R1 xn l R2 E A w T _ COM For X0 to X3 R1 6 8 kQ R2 820 Q From X4 R1 5 6 kQ R2 1 kQ 2 5 2 3 2 Output Specifications L14 YO to Y1 L30 L40 L60 YO to Y3 Transistor NPN output Po ttem eseription Y 10 us or less L14 L30 5 us or less L40 L60 Response time Load current at 15 mA or more at 25 C 40 us or less L14 L30 ON OFF 15 us or less L40 L60
69. is deleted by F159 on MTRN r DN Reception done 5 ko ee flag R9038 Reception done ON flag is turned off by executing F159 MTRN F159 MTRN a instruction execution Stored Receive buffer A B C Number of bytes received lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Write pointer E of bytes j E of bytes Number of bytes lt 0 gt received is cleared received is cleared received is cleared when the header is when F159 MTRN when the header is received is executed received The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order When the header is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 is on Also When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address If there are two headers data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer The reception done flag R9038 is turned off by the F159 MTRN instruction Therefore if F159 MTRN is executed at the same time the terminator is received the reception done flag will not be detected 6 25 Sending data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Transmitted data Tx Ca
70. it is used for another device confirm the consumption current of the device side before it is connected If excess current is being supplied for a long time the power supply may be damaged 5 7 5 4 Wiring of Input and Output 5 4 1 Input Wiring Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor Relay output type Sensor E J a 3 z i 7 Power supply for sensor Power supply for input Voltage output type Sensor Internal circuit Power supply for input Precaution when using LED equipped lead switch Y Input terminal LED equipped reed switch Two wire type sensor Sensor s leakage current mA R Bleeder resistor Kk The off voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore select the value of bleeder resistor R so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 V The input impedance is 5 6 kO 24 Therefore 5 6 R 3 4 ee eee ko 5 61 2 4 The wattage W of the resistor is Power supply voltage R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W W 5 8 NPN open collector output type FP X0 Internal circuit z a a Lm 2 Power supply for input When a LED is connected in series to an input contact such as LED equipped lead switch make sure that the on voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater than 21 6V DC In particular take care when connecting a
71. location of the expansion FPO adapter Expansion location Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3 Seer eae rape X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F P Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340 to Y35F Expansion 2nd unit AAOUNO AAIE X420 to X43F X440 to X45F Y400 to Y41F Y420 to Y43F Y440 to Y45F Expansion 3rd unit AOUD ASIE X520 to X53F X540 to X55F Y500 to Y51F Y520 to Y53F Y540 to Y55F Note The ranges of the I O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the units 4 4 4 4 3 VO Allocation of FPO FPOR Expansion Unit I O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit Carry the digit of hundreds place one by one since the second expansion unit aera Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion YP allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 Input 8 points X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347 EaR Input 4 points X300 to X303 X320 to X323 X340 to X343 Output 4 points Y300 to Y303 Y320 to Y323 Y340 to Y343 E8YT P ate Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO FPOR E16R Input 16 points CHO X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO analog VO Aon any Input 16 points unit CH1 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F conversion unit o o
72. navigator 3 Change the setting of No 26 10 3 3 Dealing with Operation Errors lt Procedure gt 1 Check the location of the error Check the address where the error occurred which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018 and make sure the high level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate 2 Clear the error Use a programming tool to clear the error When using FPWIN GR select Online gt Status Display in the menu bar Execute Clear Error When using FPWIN Pro select Monitor gt PLC Status Press the Error Clear button An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 If the mode selector is set to RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared So if the cause of the error is not removed the error may seem not to be cleared 10 3 4 Points to Check in Program 1 Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register lt Example gt When a data register is modified using an index register In this case index register modifies the address of data register DTO However it may exceed the addressable range of the data register depending on the data in I0 If the value exceeds the range an operation error will occur The same is true when the conten
73. normal ASCII code H24 lf error occurs ASCII code H21 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text 5 Terminator End code There is always a Cp ASCII code HOD at the end of the message Note When reading If no response is returned the communication format may not be correct or the command may not have arrived at the PLC or the PLC may not be functioning Check to make sure all of the communication specifications e g baud rate data length and parity match between the computer and the PLC If the response contains an instead of a the command was not processed successfully The response will contain a communication error code Check the meaning of the error code Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response see below This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear IO Same C gt same S AHA 6 10 Commands to be used Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on or off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area o Reads the contents of a data area
74. off can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R When using CHO with incremental input and reset input FP X0 Count input Reset input ON and OFF output The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired Reference lt 7 2 1 Table of Specifications gt When using CHO with two phase input and reset input FP XO A phase input xO X1 X4 B phase input Reset input Yn ON and OFF output The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired 7 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction FO This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction Counter software reset bit0 Counting operation enable disable bit1 Hardware reset enable disable bit2 Clear high speed counter instructions F166 to F167 bit3 Clear target value match interrupt bit3 Example Performing a software reset In case of CHO X7 LDF FO MV H 1 DT90052 FO MV H 0 DT90052 In case of CH1 X7 t DF FO MV H 1001
75. operation instructions jaa DLD aoe o AND PDAND EE D a P216 PDOR i S1 S2 D GN S1 AND 82 T 52 OR P217 XOR PDXOR Soy S1 AND S2 1 oe D S1 2 DI Shi St S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR P218 XNR PDXNR oo S1 AND S2 1 ee D Double word S1 S2 a 1 AND S3 1 S3 32 bit data S3 D o a AND unites S3 1 S3 gt D 1 D Data conversion instructions ial el The specified time data a date second PTMSEC and time is changed to the second conversion data Second SECTM The specified second data is data gt time PSECTM changed into time data a date and conversion time Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e only 2 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver 3 10 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 6 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 7 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 14 55 FP2SH FP10SH Ope Boolean P Description rand 16 bit binary data GRY S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of Gray code PGRY S to gray codes and the conversion converted result is stored in the D 32 bit binary data DGRY S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of Gray code ot S 1 S to gray code and the o P conver
76. output instruction flag R9120 Data table Data register Setting item Unit Example of sample program No Type 0 No target value Output type CW CCW Set according to the control code ae PONTO CORE H1000 0000 Forward Jon the next page H1000 0010 Reverse Settable range k K1 to K20000 L14 L30 type DT302 Initial speed Hz K1000 K1 to K50000 L40 L60 type K1 to K20000 L14 L30 type DT304 Target speed Hz K7000 K1 to K50000 L40 L60 K o ksoooo Laoso pe DT306 Acceleration time ms K100 K1 to K1 to K32760 DT308 Deceleration time ms K100 K1 to K32760 DT310 Target value pulses aka K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Note When the control code is set to Type 0 No target value specify 0 for the target value 1 22 Sample program 1 F1 DMV 4H 10000010 DT300 DF 1 R31 DF 1 F1 DMV K1000 DT 302 F1 DMV K 7000 DT 304 F1 DMV K 100 DT 306 F1 DMV K 100 DT 308 F1 DMV KO DT 310 R30 F172 PLSH DT 300 K 0 R31 Control code LJILIJILILILILJ 10 Fixed E Control assignment 0 JOG E Control assignment 2 0 Type 0 without target value 1 Type 1 wth target values 0 Fixed E Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only E Movement direction In case of Type 0 without target value 0 Forward 1 Reverse In case of Type 1 with target values 0 Incremental 1 Absolute E Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS
77. the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer FPWIN GR etc Command message PLC I Response message 6 1 3 General purpose Serial Communication With general purpose serial communication data can be sent back and forth between an external device connected such as an image processing device and a bar code reader Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FPOR while reading and writing of data from an external is handled through the data registers Image checker Data register DT Data transmission using a F159 MTRN E Received data Data received in receive buffer Data is sent to and received from external devices thruogh the data registers 6 2 6 1 4 PC PLC Link The FP X0O supports the link system that connects the PC PLC link corresponding to the MEWNET WO max 16 units with the twisted pair cables In a PC PLC link data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays called link relays L and data registers called link registers LD Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no4 Send area i Receive area Send area Receive area f Receive area The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs 6 1 5 Modbus RTU Function overview
78. the forced input output operation Interrupt restrictions When using interrupt high speed counter pulse output or PWM output functions do not perform a rewrite during RUN lf a rewrite during RUN is executed the operation as below will be performed Exercise caution 1 Interrupt programs will be disabled Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again lt Example gt Using R9034 rewrite during RUN completed flag R9013 ICTL S1 S2 R9034 2 The high speed counter will continue to count Target value match on off instructions F166 F167 will continue Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166 F167 instruction is running 3 The pulse output PWM output stops when the rewriting is performed The operation after the completion of the rewriting during RUN varies depending on each instruction Operation after the completion of F171 SPDH The operation before rewriting continues F172 PLSH Stop F173 PWMh PWM output Stop F174 SPOH Pulse output Selectable data table The operation before rewriting continues control operation F175 SPSH The operation before rewriting continues F177 HOME The operation before rewriting continues 4 The regular sampling trace will not stop 11 10 11 4 3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Rewrite procedure Operation of each Instruction OT KP High level Instructions MC
79. the occurrence of an error Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is being executed lt flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Lights when in the PROG Mode and indicates that operation has stopped Lights when in the PROG Mode during forced input output It flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Flashes when an error is detected during the self diagnostic ERROR function ERROR ALARM Lights if a hardware error occurs or if oepration slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated ALARM E ERR Input output indicator LEDs Indicates the on off status of the input and output 2 2 RUN PROG mode switch This switch is used to change the operation mode of the PLC Switch position Operation mode This sets the RUN mode The program is executed is executed and operation RUN upward begins prog p PROG downword e The remote switching operation from the programming tool is operable e When performing remote switching from the programming tool the setting of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED e Restart FP to operate in the mode set with the RUN PROG mode switch COM port baud rate switch This switch is used to change the baud rate of the COM port between 115200 bps and 19200 bps Position of switch On the left side 115200
80. to cancel the password protection Programs are retained 1 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed Set PLC Password Untitle1 z PLC Home Settings Current status gt 8 digits Available to access Close Available retry counts 3 counts EEA digit number Re Help f 4 digits Hex f B digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode 7 Access C Protect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric kekk Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 2 Set the items in the table below and click on the Settings button Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Unprotect 4 digits or 8 digits Input the set password Once the cancellation of protection is completed the following message is displayed FPWIN GR A The protect of PLC was released 3 Click the OK button IEF er Note Unless the access is permitted the cancellation of password cannot be executed 8 6 How to force cancel Programs and security information are all deleted 1 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed Set PLC Password Untitle x Settings Current status 8 digits Protect Available retry counts 3 counts digit number C 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric
81. 0 stages NOSO L14 L30 100 subroutines subroutines l l SUB L40 L60 500 subroutines No of interrupt er programs INT 9 programs External input 8 points Periodical program 1 point Decimal K 32 768 to K32 767 for 16 bit operation constants K K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 for 32 bit operation Hexadecimal HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation constants H HO to HEFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation Floating point f 1 175494 x 10 to f 3 402823 x 10 type f f 1 175494 x 10 to f 3 402823 x 10 Note1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 There are two types one is the hold type that the last state is stored even if the power supply turns off or the mode is changed to PROG mode from RUN mode and the other is the non hold type that the state is reset For L14 L30 type The hold type and non hold type areas are fixed For information on the sections of each area refer to the performance specifications For L40 L60 type The sections of the hold type and non hold type areas can be changed by the system registers Note3 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The numbers given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting E ie Q c O S ho E ho
82. 00 to X59F WX50 to WX59 Y500 to Y59F WY50 to WY59 Note The ranges of the I O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the cassettes and units Regarding I O numbers e Specifying X and Y numbers On the FP X and the FPO the same numbers are used for input and output Example ne gt The same numbers are used for input and output f J e Expression of numbers for input output relays Input relay X and output relay Y are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below Decimal 4 2 4 2 O Allocation of FP X0 Control Unit The I O allocation of FP X control unit is fixed I O numbers Input 8 points XO to X7 Output 6 points YO to Y5 Input 16 points XO to XF FP X0 L30R control unit Output 14 points Y0 to YD FP X0 L40R control unit Input 24 points XO to XF X10 to X17 FP X0 L40MR control unit Output 16 points YO to YF FP X0O L60R control unit Input 32 points XO to XF X10 to X1F FP X0O L60MR control unit Output 28 points YO to YF Y10 to Y17 4 3 FP X Expansion Unit I O Allocation FP X0 L14R control unit The I O numbers of FP X expasion unit differ according to the installation position of the unit I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit Type of expansion unit Number of allocation I O number FP X E14YR expansion output unit Output 14 points Y300 to Y30D FP X E16X expansion input unit Input 16 points X300 to X30F In
83. 00000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111 00011000 00011001 00011010 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100111 00011101 00011110 00011111 00111111 11111111 00001111 1001 1001 14 77 14 7 ASCII Codes b7 rare ae eRe 4 e e e e ole x Jes Jes Joe e e oe oe ee oe jos ee J em ex en e ae fo oe o o Jo o o e o 14 78 14 79 Record of changes ARCT1F505E Dec 2011 First Edition Please contact Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Suzhou Co Ltd No 97 Huoju Road New District Suzhou Jiangsu province China P R 215009 Phone 86 512 6843 2580 FAX 86 512 6843 2590 panasonic electric works net sunx Europe Headquarter Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Head Office Rudolf Diesel Ring 2 D 83607 Holzkirchen Germany Telephone 49 8024 648 0 US Headquarter Panasonic Electric Works Corporation of America Head Office 629 Central Avenue New Providence New Jersey 07974 USA Telephone 1 908 464 3550 Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd 2011 ARCT1F505E
84. 0052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 Example 2 Performing the deceleration stop of pulse output For CHO For CH1 AT xO HDF FO MV H 120 DT90052 HDF Fo MV H1120 DT90052 FO MV H 100 DT90052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 Note Performing a forced stop may cause the elapsed value at the PLC output side to differ from the elapsed value at the motor input side Therefore you must execute a home return after pulse output has stopped When executing the forced stop pulse output stop with the pulse output control instruction FO the operations being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the pulse output is immediately stopped When the forced stop request flag bit3 of DT90052 is on instructions cannot be executed When executing the deceleration stop with the pulse output control instruction FO the operations being executed with various instructions are cancelled and the deceleration operation starts When the deceleration stop request flag bits of DT90052 is on instructions cannot be executed As for the data table control instruction F174 the operation is similar to that of the forced stop After the execution of the forced stop or deceleration stop pulses are not output unless the execution condition of each pulse output instruction F171 to F177 changes from OFF to ON 7 19 7 4 6 Elapsed Value Read and Write F1 Instruction Elapsed value read and write instruction F1 This instruction is used to
85. 10 F1 DMV K 1000 DT402 Frequency 1 1000Hz F1 DMV kK 1000 DT404 Target value 1 1000 pulses F1 DMV K 2500 DT 406 Frequency 2 2500Hz F1 DMV K4000 DT408 Target value 2 4000 pulses F1 DMV K5000 DT410 Frequency 3 5000Hz F1 DMV k9000 DT412 Target value 3 9000 pulses F1DMV 1000 DT414 Frequency 4 1000Hz F1DMV K11000 DT416 Target value 4 11000 pulses FipMv KO DT418 Pulse output stop F174 SPOH DT 100 Ko Pulse output start R9120 R400 TO R402 HDF R402 TMX 0 K3 Control code 10 Fixed Control assignment 0 Arbitrary table control 000 Fixed m Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental 1 Absolute m Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 7 30 7 4 11 Linear Interpolation Control Instruction F175 For L40 and L60 types The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table Specify the number KO corresponding to the channel CHO assinged to the X axis to execute the F175 instruction When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed Example of timing chart Acceleration time Deceleration time 100ms 1000ms Frequency Target speed 10kHz Initial speed 1kHz Positioning operation start R10 Positioning o
86. 15 X17 Lo Jo w a ua 8 e a xe xe a a x4 X16 oooocooo ene 100 240 Grav ococcoso A lk RS4E5 OUT 03A TrNPN 0 elad o E we Dya Ds i NA ye vel Y3 COMO COMI COM2 Y7 COM3 YA COM4 YD YF Control unit Up to 2 expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion I O units can FPO unit 1 Expansion unit 3 be connected adapter unit 2 Restrictions on installation positions of FPO FPOR units Up to three FPO FPOR expansion units and advanced units can be installed on the right hand side of the expansion FPO adapter Note Install the FPO thermocouple unit on the right side of all other expansion units If it is installed on the left side the total precision will deteriorate Install the FPO CC Link slave unit on the right side of the other expansion units There is no expansion connector on the right side 1 6 1 3 Programming Tools 1 3 1 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Type of software OS Operating system Se Product No Full t a AFPS10520 ul type Wi M FPWIN GR Ver 2 NONE E Windows 2000 40MB or Upgrade Windows XP more version Windows Vista Windows 7 Note1 Ver 1 1 must be installed to install the upgrade version Note2 Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver 2 1 free of charge at our web site http panasonic denko co p ac e dl software list patch plc jsp Use the latest version English language menu AFPS10520R
87. 7 E 643 640 Process No 9011 832 to 847 1 During running 0 During stopping Step ladder process DT90113 848 to 863 A programming tool software can be used to Step ladder process write data ANLA 864 to 879 Step ladder process nee 880 to 895 Step ladder process DT90116 896 to 911 Step ladder process OTASIN 912 to 927 Step ladder process PTS 928 to 943 Step ladder process PSSS 944 to 959 Step ladder process OTASAN 960 to 975 Step ladder process DT90121 976 to 991 Step ladder process DT90122 992 to 999 higher byte is not used 14 28 A Available N A Not available ing ing DT90123 COM1 SEND RECV For details refer to Programming Manual R instruction end code F145 and F146 N A DT90125 Notused _ __ _ gt gt gt Z DT90126 Forced ON OFF Used by the system N A operating station display DT90127 to DT90139 DT90140 DT90141 DT90142 ares MEWNET WO The number of times the receiving operation is performed The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum inerval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms PC PLC link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is me DT90144 performed DT90145 The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms D
88. 90304 Elapsed Lower words cone oe ney A Note1 the main unit A DT90305 Higher words HSC CH1 The target value is set when A Raves ibeatge ii instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed A DT90307 Higher words l A Counting area for input X2 or a ieapees X2 X3 of the main unit DT90309 Higher words HSC CH2 Note1 gt f gt Note1 The target value is set when RRO ETa instructions F166 HC1S and DT90311 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed for i X3 of DT90312 Elapsed Counting area or input X3 o the main unit value DT90313 area Higher words HSC CH3 Th t value is set when instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R are executed A DT90315 Higher words l A DT90316 DT90363 Note1 Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only gt 14 33 Address DT90370 DT90371 DT90372 DT90373 DT90374 DT9037 DT9037 DT90377 DT90378 DT90379 DT90380 DT90381 DT90382 DT90383 DT90384 DT90385 DT90386 DT90387 DT90388 DT90389 DT90400 DT90401 DT90402 DT90403 DT90404 to DT90409 DT90410 DT90411 DT90412 DT90413 DT90414 to DT90419 14 34 A Available N A Not available E Read Writ mame Doseripton Fig mg When HSC CEN is executed by FO MV S DT90052 Control flag monitor aii the setting value fo
89. 90311 Note1 The reset input X5 and X7 are also used for the home input of the pulse output function It is necessary to set how to use each input by system registers Note2 For information on minimum input pulse width also refer to lt 7 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width gt Note3 The maximum counting speed is the values when execuing with the conditions of each item counting method or number of channels only These values are not available if executing the HSC match ON OFF instruction other pulse I O process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program Pulse output function input output contact number used Memory area used FG UME specifications Channel No Deviation Pulse counter output Target Max output value clear instructtion Bee value area frequency Elapsed output flag Y3 X5 DT90400 DT90402 L14 L30 lt bit4 gt l CH1 Y2 Nene Motes R9121 DT90410 DT90412 Note1 Note2 a DT9041 1 DT9041 3 Note1 The L14 type can only use CHO It also cannot use the deviation counter clear output tee When using the deviation counter clear output of CHO on the L30 L40 or L60 type the output Y2 can be used only for the normal output or PWM output Note3 The output Y3 can be used only for one of the following Deviation counter clear output of CHO CCW output of CH1 and Sign output of CH1 Note4 The home inputs X5 and X7 are used for the reset input of the high speed counter It is necessary to set how to use each i
90. A code communication error occurs 14 25 A Available N A Not available ao Read Writ Step ladder process DT90060 0 to 15 Step ladder process DT90061 16 to 31 Step ladder process DT90062 32 to 47 Step ladder process 48 to 63 Step ladder process 64 to 79 Step ladder process DT90065 80 to 95 Step ladder process Aiki 96 to 111 DT90067 Step ladder process 112 to 127 Indicates the startup condition of the step DT90068 Step ladder process ladder process When the process starts up 128 to 143 the bit corresponding to the process number Step ladder process turns on ASSR 144 to 159 pT90070 SteP ladder process Monitor using binary display 160 to 175 A A lt E le gt DT90071 sais aaa ia es n 7 3 ar DT90060 tep ladder process 15 11 7 3 0 Process No DT90072 1 92 to 207 1 Executing 0 Not executing Step ladder process DT90073 208 to 223 A programming tool software can be used to Step ladder process Write data eeeores 224 to 239 Step ladder process ae 240 to 255 Step ladder process nue 256 to 271 Step ladder process PPSS 272 to 287 Step ladder process AISAS 288 to 303 DT90063 DT90064 DT90079 Step ladder process 304 to 319 Step ladder process achat 320 to 335 Step ladder process Eee 336 to 351 14 26 A Available N A Not available D Ka Read Writ Address escription ing ing Step ladder process pues 352 to 367 Step ladde
91. A in total Output points per common Circuit diagram rrr rrr Tr rT TO TT Ta e a a e e e es Internal circuit COM 2 2 4 Analog Input Specifications For L40 and L60 types 2 4 1 Common Specifications to Analog Input Overview Two channel analog inputs are available for FP XO You can select potentiometer volume input thermister input or voltage input for each channel Converted digital values are stored in special data registers DODODO CHO Q O8M CH1 The input connector is located on the underside of the unit Total accuracy Specifications Min potentiometer resistance 5kQ Resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 Accuracy 1 0 F S External resistance accuracy Potentiometer Volume input Allowable thermister resistance External thermister min resistance External resistance gt 2kQ Resolution 10 bits KO to K1023 Accuracy 1 0 F S External thermister accuracy Woltade nou Absolute max input voltage 10V Resolution 10 bits KO to K1023 is Accuracy 2 5 F S F S 10V Special data register Potentiometer Volume input Thermister input voltage input Analog input channel Special data Range of Special data Range of register values register values Thermister input DT90041 DT90045 2 8 2 4 2 Connection of Analog Input Cable Precautions on wiring Note the following points and make connection using the cable supplied wit
92. Cb ETX GT Co TE Ce ETK Transmission Transmission ON Transmission done flag D OFF R9039 Duplex transmission ON cisatiog while F159 J F159 MTRN executed es Instruction execution Send buffer a fe a a b b b DEE i E E E a a i a oe l Number of bytes not yet ae as ef transmitted oe Transmission pointer Header STX and terminator ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted The data is transmitted to an external device When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the transmission done flag R9039 goes off Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 must be observed 6 26 6 5 6 Changing Communication Mode Using F159 MTRN Instruction An F159 MTRN instruction can be executed to change between general purpose serial communication mode and computer link mode To do so specify H8000 for n the number of transmission bytes and execute the instruction Changing from general purpose to computer link RO R9032 HDF H 1 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed KO Tool port K1 COM port Changing from computer link to general purpose RO R9032 H DF D 1 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed KO Tool port K1 COM port R9032 The COM port mode flag tur
93. DT90052 FO MV H 1000 DT90052 7 8 In the program shown on the left the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X0 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 The area DT90052 for writing channels aiiai Doni eel DDE and control codes is allocated as shown in naan the left figure ie eco HO Ficad HEC Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in HO Fixed special data registers DT90370 to Clear high speed counter instruction DT90373 0 Continue 1 Clear Reset input setting te O Available 1 Not available Note In the reset input setting the reset input allocated in the high speed counter Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit setting of the system registers are defined Software reset to enable disable 0 No 1 Yes High speed counter control flag monitor area Channel No Control code flag monitor area CHO DT90370 DT90371 DT90372 DT90373 Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 This instruction writes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter Specify this instruction together with the elapsed value area of high speed counter after the special data register DT90300 If the F1 DMV instruction is executed specifying DT90300 the elapsed value will be stored as 32 bit
94. Del TEN TY CS iisnetcar ga netinateiaresiGracun E 1 2 1 2 Restrictions On Unit Combinations cece ccc eeceeceeeeceeeeceeeeseeeesseeeesaeees 1 4 kore rOCrarmining OOS sotiotrcuetsarineelnwwsaniunel nu aadeunaeeanhetebadete iene natneicnn 1 7 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit ccecssseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 1 21 Pants and FUNCOMS meseta a a 2 2 2 2 Power Supply Specifications siressa aa ra aa aE 2 4 2 3 Input Output Specifications cee ccc eeceeceececeeeeeceeeseueeseeeeeseeeeseeessaeeesens 2 5 2 4 Analog Input Specifications For L40 and L60 types cc eeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 2 0 Terminal Lay OUL cea a a eae 2 12 Specifications of Expansion Units and Expansion FPO Adapter 3 1 2l EPX EXPANSION OU MNS i cctnadti opin ciccnanconacnsiece ach amend vines aeelnniicutamaderninginnndonn 3 2 3 2 FP X Expansion FPO Adapter cccccscccssceceeeeceecceeeceuseceeeeeeeessueenaees 3 10 VO PUNO CANON cies wrateteiane reece bate chereueheveriee N 4 1 A AWS AIO CAO Meissctesta saci sient taatecadeesiuchya a E 4 2 4 2 I O Allocation of FP XO Control Unit cccccccceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeceeeteneeenens 4 3 4 3 FP X Expansion Unit I O Allocation ccccccccseeeseeeeecesecseeeeseeeesseeeenees 4 3 4 4 Allocation of FPO FPOR Expansion UNiit ccccccsececeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaes 4 4 installation and VV MEIN sissien anann aa aaa 5 1 SENSI ON a a A E S 5 2 5 2 Expansion Meh
95. Description When using MEWNET WO MEWNET WO Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PC PLC R9050 PC PLC link transmission link error flag Turns on when there is an error in the PC PLC link area settings R9051 to R905F 14 15 WR906_ FP a ae 14 16 MEWNET WO PC PLC link 0 transmission assurance Name __ on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped whe
96. Do not dismantle or remodel the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Ground the protective earth PE terminal Class D grounding Failure to do so could lead to an electric shock Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction Such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PLC_BATPE Table of Contents Difference in Specifications Between FP X0 Models Before You Start Programming Tool Restrictions 1 Unit Types and ReStrictiOns cccccceseccsseceeeeeeseeeseeeeseenseeeseeenseseeeseaseoeees 1 1
97. Es mbinatonoinignsbees counter Combination with pulse output function trapezoidal control Single phase No pulse output CHO CH1 Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the target value match ON OFF instruction F166 F 167 or an interrupt program is executed simultaneously Pulse input output performance Independent control Single phase OA eee ee eee eee eee A Note The L14 type can only use CHO aak Single phase Max output frequency kHz For L14 L30 type For L40 L60 type OO A Nous y O O 7 9 7 3 High speed Counter Function 7 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function Instructions used and the contents of the controls number counter _ the specified channel or disabling the count depsotvaue neue elapsed value Target value match ON OFF control F166 Turns on F166 instruction or off F167 instruction the specified output when the elapsed value of T high speed counter F167 reaches the target value The output is used by presetting with an instruction such as the SET RET instruction Input pulse F178 Measures the pulse number and cycle of the high speed counter measurement Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set the system registers No 400 and 401 7 3 2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode Decremental input mode XO i ON X1 X2 a APPLE Lit oe ease ee
98. For general purpose serial communication half duplex transmission must be used Reception is disabled when the reception done flag R9038 is on When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address Also when F159 MTRN is executed the error flag R9037 the reception done flag R9038 and the transmission done flag R9039 goes off Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 must be observed Reception stops if the error flag R9037 goes on To resume reception execute the F159 MTRN instruction which turns off the error flag EF Note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program 6 24 Header STX Terminator ETX Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Data received A gt B C gt amp TX D E ETH F GST H ET from external device Cannot be stored when Reception code is reception done flag
99. If there is a large number of characters to be written they may be divided and sent as several commands if there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded they may be divided and several responses sent 6 9 Response message The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer m DHeader Unit no of source PLC that processed the command decimal m Processing results and communication error codes ar estored here ES Check code BCC Hexadecimal STerminator Two One A digit digit Read value Processing results for contact area read contact is off Command name e g read contact area Response code indicates a normal processing result indicates that an error occurred 1 Header Start code A ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C must be at the beginning of a message The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here 3 Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command If the processing is not completed successfully an error code will be stored here so that the content of the error can be checked 0 1 RC 1 2 0 amp 4 4 f the read command was used the data that was read is stored here If normal Command name If error occurs Error code Response code If
100. It link table sending time The various items in the formula are calculated as described below Ts transmission time per station Ts scan time Tpc PC PLC link sending time Tpc Ttx Sending time per byte x Pem PLC link sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Pem 23 number of relay words number of register words x 4 Tit link table sending time Tit Ttx Sending time per byte x Ltm link table sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Ltm 13 2 x n n number of stations being added Tso master station scan time This should be confirmed using the programming tool Tlk link addition processing time If no stations are being added Tik 0 TIk Tic link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tis Sending time for command to stop transmission if link error occurs Tso master station scan time Tic 10 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Twt Initial value 400 ms can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction Tis 7 x Ttx Sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Tso Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocate
101. LC link the link transmission cycle will be longer Setting PC PLC link switching flag PC PLC link switching flag can be set using system register no 46 If it is set to O default value the first half of the link relays and registers are used If it is set to 1 the second half of the link relays and registers are used First half WLO to WL63 LDO to LD127 is used second half WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD255 is used Main flag Link area First half 1 WLOto WL63 LDO to LD127 Second half O WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD225 6 40 6 6 6 Monitoring When Using PC PLC Link When using a PC PLC link the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays Transmission assurance relays For PC PLC link 0 R9060 to R906F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9080 to R908F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data R906F R906E R906D R906C R906B R906A R9069 R9068 R9067 R9066 R9065 R9064 RYN63 RYI062 RY061 R9060 mno 6 s lsn ojee r lels elele Conditions ON When the PC PLC link is normal for on off OFF When transmission is stopped a problem has occurred or a PC PLC link is not used Operation mode relays For PC PLC link 0 R9070 to R907F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC
102. MCE CALL SUB RET INT IRET Maximum of 128 steps Changes are performed by block When PG conversion is executed online the program will be rewritten Boa lt Bocks If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held When writing MC MEC instructions be sure to write the instructions as a pair A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction An interrupt program is a program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction Rewriting performed by step Caution is required as rewriting takes place simultaneously with the change If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Y contact relays which are on will be held in the on state To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output If an instruction written in b
103. MV H1 WRO J L Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the 70 communication port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 H F146 RECV DT 100 DTO KO bT6o FO MV _ HO WRO 6 50 Flow chart Data initialization DTS0 and DT51 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 and DT51 a F145 Sends a data Sends a data Execute F146 RECV SEND instruction instruction write command read command Turns RO off The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM port 3 Reads the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM port 6 51 Sample program For Type Il Use a program as below to directly specify a MODBUS address 6 52 For Send command set the used communication port to COM1 destination unit No 0 to 07 MODBUS command No to 6 register single point preset in DT100 r Also for Receive command set the same settings except Modbus command No It should be 03 in DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 R9013 H Fo mv H1607 DT100 7
104. NENI MNS Wi WEN NEN i y Oy CIR vy 6 Ve S CACO wd 5 J y a w I a a S 7 State that the expansion cover was removed FP X E30 exapansion I O unit fee PQBOQQEQQOEAE DIN rail attachment DOQOOOSOOE GOOOOLOOOGYSOS o m State that the expansion cover was removed Input and Output indicator LEDs Indicates the on off status of the input and output Input terminal block This is the input terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Output terminal block This is the output terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Expansion connector Connects with the control unit expansion unit and the expansion FPO adapter using the exclusive expansion cable Expansion cover It is used after the expansion cable has been fitted DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch Terminator setting DIP switch All switches should be turned on for the expansion unit installed at the last position 3 2 3 1 2 Power Supply Specifications AC Power Supply Specifications Rated voltage 100 to 240 V AC Voltage regulation range 85 to 264 V AC 40 A or less at 240 V AC 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals meme shee Suepy pelt 20 000 hours at 55 C Guaranteed life Built in Cannot
105. OOOE 2a ee e e P8989989 BEEE N Ou xi o 5 x 59 P O F X H Ds wy Le Ww O u w a A E E KO RID e RM NAA eE Control Unit FP X Expansion Unit E16 FP X Expansion Unit E16 FP X Expansion Unit E30 Toi al QRAAAQ2XQQA al 2sane Il _PaBocococody N Ou hh Oo 5 0 50 0 W d an 7 IJa o g u a a A re a Ko ae Xj Tumv PSRS c wl w we va y va towo tout COMI vr towed YA COA YO YF s PRECSSeeceaE IRI GIR Gd O iis SOOGOOOOOOT Ni Control Unit FP X Expansion Unit E16 FP X Expansion Unit E30 FP X Expansion Unit E16 Restriction on the length of FP X expansion cable When using an expansion cable AFPX EC30 30 cm type or AFPX EC80 80 cm type sold separately the total length of the expansion cables should be within 160 cm 1 5 1 2 2 Restrictions on Using Expansion FPO Adapter For L40 L60 only Restrictions on type of FP X0 control units Only one expansion FPO adapter can be connected to FP X0 L40 or L60 control unit Restrictions on installation positions of Expansion FPO adapter When connecting the expansion FPO adapter to FP X0 L40 or L60 control unit only one unit can be connected at the last position of the expansion bus Cnnect it on the righ hand side of all other FP X expansion units Up to two FP X expansion I O units can be installed between the control unit and expansion FPO adapter TARRQQQQLQAQAHAQAAQAQAEA Be YOOOOOWVOOOOOS om oceacacn XS X7 X9 X XO XF X11 X13 X
106. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP X0 Users Manual Applicable PLC types FP X0O e L14R L30R L40R L40MR L60R L60MR ARCT1F505E 2011 12 panasonic electric works net sunx Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts Battery may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of fire CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications
107. RG Sampling stop trigger instruction R902C Sample point flag OFF Sampling by instruction ON Sampling at regular time intervals R902D Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts 0 stops 1 R902E sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on R902F sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts DT90028 Interval of sampling trace KO For sampling by instruction K1 to K3000 10 ms to 30 seconds For sampling at regular time intervals 9 2 2 Details of Sampling Trace Function No of data collectable at one sampling 16 bits 3 data Sampling capacity No of samples accumulable 1000 samples Types of sampling timing When an instruction is executed or at regular time intervals 1 Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms 2 Sampling by F155 SMPL instruction Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction Also more than one sampling can be executed in one scan Timing for the execution of the F155 SMPL instruction can be set by the ladder sequence It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the F155 SMPL instruction simultaneously How to stop sampling Methods of the stop trigger request Following two methods are available 1 Deactivate request by the tool software 2 Deactivate request by the F156 STRG instruction If the stop trigger activates the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specif
108. SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 7 4 8 Home Return Instruction F177 When the trigger execution condition turns on the home return is performed according to a specified data table On the completion of the home return the elapsed value area is reset to 0 When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed Even when the home input is on the pulse output starts by the execution of this instruction When the near home input turns on during acceleration the deceleration operation starts There are two kinds of control method which are type 0 and type 1 Operation modes of Home return operation There are two kinds of operation modes which are type 0 and type 1 Type 0 The home input is effective regardless of whether or not there is a near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been completed Also the home return can be performed without the near home input Without near home input With near home input Speed Home input ON Speed Near home Home input ON input ON Max speed Max speed Initial speed Initial speed OHz OHz f R Home input is effective at any time Home input ON during deceleration Near home Speed input ON Home Max speed input ON Initial speed OHz Type 1 In this mode the home input is effective only after dec
109. Songan enc ATA ener When no pulse is measured for more than the measure ment limit time specified in DT100 1 is stored in DT204 and DT205 Measured pulse cycle is stored in the following DT after the measurement dys unit DT202 DT203 1 ms unit DT204 DT205 Example When a single pulse of 250Hz was measured repeatedly Pulse number measured within 100 ms 25 Error 1 is stored in DT200 and DT201 Pulse cycle 1 250 x 10 4000 Errort1 is stored in DT202 and DT203 Pulse cycle 1 250 x 10 4 Error 1 is stored in DT204 and DT205 Sample program F178 Reads the elapsed value of high speed counter CHO DT900300 DT90301 to DT166 DT67 0 Compares it with the previous read elapsed value DT68 DT69 If unmatched exectues F178 R9010 F1 DMV DT90300 DT66 R900B R80 F61 CMP DT66 DT 68 F178 Execution condition Executes F178 instruction Measurement limit 1 s Measurement unit 1s and ims No of moving average 5 times Channel No CHO Measurement cycle 10 ms DT60 DT61 Stores pulse number DT62 DT63 Stores pulse cycle in 1ps unit DT64 DT65 Stores pulse cycle in 1ms unit R80 K _ _F 178 PLSM H 5350 Kk DT60 F178 Execution condition Converts the measured pulse cycle us to frequency Hz Performs real number calculation for the reciprocal of the measured pulse cycle DT62 DT63 to DT72 DT73 Rounds off t
110. Sz us a u D O D Or I re re Left shift of one and D2 to the left hexadecimal digit 4 bit Q Available X Not available Not available partially UT T T U Tl U TI U T v T U TI v T TI U TI h h h h h h h h h h h l h l h l oO oOo oO O O O fee ao Sola 0 HO Qo wr 23 85 2 14 48 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope ee A Boolean p Description A rand eee kppp P115 PFIFT defined in the buffer o Data read from S D The oldest data beginning from S FIFO buffer that was written to the buffer is read 5 x ojo 0j and stored in D meet k efofeblle P117 buffer PFIFW starting from D S a Basic function instructions O S O Basic function instructions F118 UP DOWN counter UDC S D Counts up or down from the value js o o ololololo preset in S and stores the elapsed 5 OJO oo value in D register the area between D1 and D2 as 5 0 5o 0B the register pa ce e P arre fpf rotate PROR the right 7 fefe P121 rotate PROL the left ain els as e ee p 16 bit data right Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area p o olo o rotate with carry PRCR consisting of D plus the carry flag 510 0 0 0o flag R9009 data R9009 data to the right F123 16 bit data left RCL D n Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area P123 rotate with carry PRCL consisting of D plus the carry flag 5 0 ojo olo flag R9009 data R9009 data
111. T90146 The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90147 The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90148 is performed DT90149 The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90150 The minimum inerval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90151 The maximum interval between two receiving MEWNET WO operations value in the register x 2 5ms N A The number of times the sending operation is performed The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms Area used for measurement of receiving interval A N A Area used for measurement of sending i PC PLC link 1 status MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 0 status The number of times the receiving operation A interval 14 29 A Available N A Not available ing ing Area used for measurement of receiving DT90159 PC PLC link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending interval MEWNET WO DT90160 PC PLC link 0 unit No Stores the unit No of PC PLC link 0 N A DT90161 PC PLC link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC PLC link 0 A N A flag DT90162 to N A N A DT90169 DT90170 Duplicated destination for PC PLC inter link
112. TC4 CHO 2 4 6 X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F couple unit CH1 3 5 7 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO D A FP0 A04V Output 16 points conversion unit FPO A04I CHO 2 Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Output 16 points WY31 WY33 WY35 CH1 3 Y310 to Y31F Y330 to Y33F Y350 to Y35F FPO FPO IOL Input 32 points X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F VO link unit Output 32 points Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340 to Y35F Input 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6 CHO 2 4 X20 to X2F X40toX4F X60 to X6F i Input 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7 Pep Pee CH1 3 5 X30 to X3F X50toX5F X70 to X7F Output 16 points me bean mero p p Y20 to Y2F Y40to Y4F Y60 to Y6F e The data for each channel of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TC4 FP0 TC8 FPO RTD unit FPO RTD6 and FPO D A conversion unit FPO A04V FPO A041 is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual FPO RTD unit 4 6 Chapter 5 Installation and Wiring 5 1 Installation 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space Be thoroughly familiar with the following contents before using the units to eliminate the causes which occur the failure or malfunction of each unit Operating environment Use the unit wit
113. TOOL port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose serial Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose serial communication Note R9030 to R903F can be changed during 1 scan Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication 14 14 WR904_ FP X0 Address Name Description Goes on when the general purpose serial R9040 TOOL port mode flag communication is used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used R9041 COM1 port PC PLC link flag Turn on while the PC PLC link function is used R9042 Notused R9043 Notused Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can be executed or not for the COM1 port COM1 port SEND RECV Off None of the above mentioned instructions can be R9044 l Instruction execution flag executed During executing the instruction On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the COM1 port SEND RECV execution of the F145 SEND or F146 RECV R9045 SINE DI ERECHTION GG instructions for the COM1 port as follows Off No abonormaility detected flag On An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored in DT90124 R9046 to R904F Note R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan WR905_ FP X0 Address Names
114. The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note2 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Note3 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS instruction only Note4 Although it has adequate tolerance to noise it is recommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communication in case of communication errors occurred by excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive temporarily No of connected units 12 6 COM port For L40MR and L60MR types Item Specifications Interface RS485 Max 1200 m 19200 115200 bps Noes Communication method Two wire half duplex transmission Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Multicore shielded line Trans Computer link ASCII code serial communication Communication format to be set by system register isi Computer link master slave Modem initialization Communication functions General purpose serial communication Modbus RTU master slave PC PLC link Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and
115. Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode R907B Turns on when Unit No 12 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode 14 17 WR908 FP a ae 14 18 MEWNET WO PC PLC link 1 transmission assurance Name __ on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in PC PLC link m
116. Use the following formula to convert the thermister resistance and digital conversion value Digital conversion values vary between KO and K1012 1012 x R kQ Thermister resistance KQ _ R KQO Digital value 1 Connected thermister Example R 2 2kQO Thermisters whose resistance is between 200 and 75kQ can be used Type of thermister B constant Reference of measuring range C 3390K 50 to 100 C 3450K 50 to 150 C 4300K 100 to 200 C 5133K 150 to 300 C Thermister measurement temperature A D conversion table Example Thermister B constant 3450K external resistance R 2 2kQ Temperature C Thermister resistance kQ Digital value after conversion 4 3560 344 50 oO AO S A a Oa O OB pO e p00 tO HD Note The digital value does not include Total accuracy of A D converter with built in microcomputer 5LSB Thermister accuracy 2 10 Conversion program using Scaling instruction F282 Appropriately interpolated data can be obtained from nonlinear data by creating the data table of digital values after conversion and temperature and executing the scaling instruction F282 DT90044 Special data register Digital value after thermister input LH F282 DT 90044 DTO DT100 conversion DTO Beginning of data table DT100 Data after conversion Temperature Example of data table after conversion Temperature Temperature mo on o e
117. Write data area WD Writes data to a data area R imer nter i ead timer counter set Reads the timer counter setting value value area Write timer nter i ite timer counter set ws Wrte the timer counter setting value value area R imer counter ead timer counte RK Reads the timer counter elapsed value elapsed value area Write timer nter ite timer counte WK Writes the timer counter elapsed value elapsed value area Register or R egister O eset MC Registers the contact to be monitored contacts monitored Regi R i egister or Reset data yp Registers the data to be monitored monitored Monitoring start a Monitors a registered contact or data using MD and MC Preset contact area fill Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on and off command pattern Preset data area fill Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified command range Read system register Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller RUN mode lt gt PROG mode Read contact area Write contact area Remote control 6 4 3 Communication Parameter Settings Tool port RS232C COM port RS485 The settings for baud rate and communication format are entered using a programming tool Setting
118. able N A Not available Product No oto GE ea Relay Analog Glock V A ee input Duh output input calender ae output port N A AFPXOL30R i ee O A AFPXOL40R p 4 pains AFPXOL40MR ponis ons AFPXOL60MR sia aie Note1 For all the units the power supply is 100 to 240 V AC and DC input is 24 V DC Common polarities amp common Note2 An optional backup battery is required to use the clock calender function 1 1 2 FP X Expansion Unit Can be added to L40 L60 only Specifications Product No Ne on he points Powersupply Input Output Relay type Ry type AFPX E16R 8 8 AFPX E30R _ 16 14 100 to 240 V AC Rees en AFPX E30RD_ 16 14 24VDC i Transistor type NPN Tr type AFPX E16T 88 J AFPX E30T 16 14 100to 240 VAG 24 V DO Common AFPX E30TD 16 14 24 V DG polarities amp common NPN Transistor type PNP Tr type AFPX E16P 8 8 AFPX E30P 16 14 100 to 240 V AC enn a Me AFPX E30PD 16 14 24 V DC P Input only type AFPX E16X 16 0 Spa eo mon polarities amp common Output only type Relay type AFPX EI4YR oa fe o e e Note An 8 cm expansion cable is provided with an expansion unit Transistor 1 2 1 1 3 FP X Expansion FPO Adapter Can be added to L40 L60 only Appearance Name Specifications Product No FP X Expansion FPO adapter with 8 cm expansion cable power supply cable For connecting FPO expansion unit to AFPX EFPO control un
119. able for reception receive buffer a ke The received number DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive buffer of bytes is stored as System register settings are as follows K8 data is stored DT201 H42 B H41 A System register 416 K200 DT202 H44 D H43 C Received data is System register 417 K5 z stored in order from D1203 H46 F H45 E the lower order byte Binary data can be DT204 148 H H47 G also received Receive buffer when reception is completed Reception done flag on Sample program for receiving data 10 byte data received in the receive buffer through the communication port 1 are copied to DTO R9038 R10 The internal relay R10 is tumed on when 1 the reception done contact R9038 turns on R10 er See ea Se ene ee FIOBKMY D201 DT204 DTO aa a f Retrieving received data t The received data in the receive buffer is The contents of the four words read from the area in which it is stored i from DT201 to DT204 DT201 and sent to DTO J R10 HL Fisso MTRN DT 100 KO Preparing to receive the next data l To prepare to receive the next data the Starting from DT100 F159 instructon resets the buffer writing point KO and turns off the reception done the contents of 0 bytes are sent from communication K1 port contact R9038 L The data in the receive buffer is not cisared The program described above is executed in the following sequen
120. address DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 ba ust aia commands have MEWNET WO DT90175 PC PLC link 0 status No of times sum check errors have occurred during reception DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in received data DT90177 No of times transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No of times procedural errors have occurred DT90179 No of times overlapping parent units have occurred DT90180 to DT90218 14 30 A Available N A Not available ates name eneton u Unit No Station No ae DT90219 selection for DT90220to 2 Unit No Station No 1 to 8 A A DT90251 1 Unit No Station No 9 to 16 ter 40 and 41 i i System regis Unit ter 42 and 43 DT90222 station The contents of the system register settings No iorg ter 44and 45_ partaining to the PLC inter link function for DT90223 System regis the various unit numbers are stored as ter 46 and 47 __ shown below ee System regis i i ma laine When DT90219 is 0 Unit ter 42 and 43 is Higher byt L b DT90226 station 579020 te aaaea ter 44 and 45 of No 2 or 10 DT90243 DT90227 System regis Unit Station ter 46 and 47 No 1 Setting contents ter 40 and 41 ip een System regis ee 4143 4 ad 47 DT90229 link ee ee P ter 42 and 43 Unit A N A DT90230 station e When the system
121. ail to input the correct password for 3 times in Succession you cannot access the program Turn the power supply of the PLC off and then on again to try to input the password again al S Note If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off when the access is permitted the PLC will be password protected again 8 3 How to prohibit access with password 1 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed Set PLC Password Untitle1 PLE Home Settings Current status Password i not set Close Available retry counts 3 counts poe panel digit number as Help f 4 digits Hex Operation Mode 7 Access f Protect f Unprotect 6 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 2 Set the items in the table below and click on the Settings button Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Protect 4 digits or 8 digits Input a password to be set Set PLC Password Untitle1 Em Enter the password in alphanumeric ekoko Do not forget this password 3 Input the password for confirmation again and click the OK button Once the PLC is in write read inhibit state Qassword protected the following message is displayed FPWIN GR A PLC became disabled to write read 4 Cl
122. an error The ERROR ALARM LED will flash and the self diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on How to check for duplicated use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool by the following method Using tool software Select the Debug gt Totally Check Program in the menu bar and click Execute If there are any duplicated outputs an error message and the address will be displayed Enabling duplicated output If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicated output can be enabled In this case change the setting of system register 20 to enable When this is done an error will not occur when the program is executed 11 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction Condition of internal and output relays during operation When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer instructions and OT KP SET and RST instructions the contents are rewritten at each step during operation lt Example gt Processing when SET RST and OT instructions are used X0 to X2 are all on This section of the program is processed as if RO are on This section of the program is processed as if RO are off This section of the program Is processed as if RO are on The output is determined by the final operation results If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT KP
123. an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation R9009 Carry flag results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed Turns on when the compared results are larger in the R900A Fl ee comparison instructions F60 to F63 Turns on when the compared results are equal in the comparison R900B instructions F60 to F63 when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions Turns on when the compared results are smaller in the eee comparison instructions F60 to F63 Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in Auxiliary timer the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM Contact auxiliary timer instruction The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off Tool port ae R900E ae Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred communication error Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in Constant scan error R900F fla system register 34 during constant scan execution g This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34 Backup battery error ee flag non hold Backup battery error flag hold R9008 R900D 14 11 WR901 FP X0 Address Name Description mos Initial on type pulse Goes on for only the first scan after operation RUN has been started and goes off for the second and subsequent relay scans Initial off type pulse Goes off for only the first scan after operation RUN has
124. and When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 lower limit S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D control When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 gt D 1 D Floating point FBAND S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 type data PFBAND S3 D S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D dead band When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 control S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 0 gt D 1 D Floating point S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 0 type data zone 3 D S3 1 S3 4 S14 1 S1 gt D 1 D control When S3 1 S3 0 0 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D Floating point FMAX S1 S2 Searches the maximum value in the type data maxi PFMAX D real number data table between the mum value area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Floating point S1 S2 Searches the minimum value in the type data mini D real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 D mum value type data total and mean values Floating point stored in the D 3 D 2 Floating point FSORT 1 S2 The real number data from the area type data sort PFSORT S3 specified by S1 to S2 are stored in ascending order the smallest word is first or descendin
125. ansmission size 20 20 24 lo Note No 40 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link register allocation Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 System registers Setting for various units No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Range of link registers used o 4 80 Jo Starting No for link register transmission 40 Link register transmission size 40o 40 J48 o Note No 41 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations 6 36 For PC PLC link 1 Link relay allocation Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 WL64 No 1 e Receive area ea Receive area 103 s 104 O lt p Send area System registers Setting for various units No 1 No 2 No 3 Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 lo Note No 50 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link register allocation Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 LD128 O Send area System registers No 1 No 2
126. ant setting 4 X1C to X1F gt For L60 O p c O S E Q hom O ho O O 14 10 14 1 3 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP X L14 L30 L40 L60 WR900_ FP X0 Address R9000 Self diagnostic error Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs The content of self diagnostic error is stored in DT90000 R9001 flag R9002 Notused e O R9003 R9004 ao eur Turns on when an I O verification error occurs Turns on when a backup battery error occurs Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system register No 4 has been set not to inform the battery error Turns on when a backup battery error occurs Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system register No 4 has been set not to inform the battery error Once a battery error has been detected this is held even after recovery has been made It goes off if the power supply is turned off or if the system is initialized Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error Operation error flag occurs hold The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 indicates the first operation error which occurred Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs Operation error flag non hold gt The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs This is set if
127. ate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 5 600 to be set by system register 115200 bps Transmission General purpose code serial ASCII Binary communication ae Data length 7 bits 8 bits eal eae None Even Odd epee Set Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits i Note1 Start code STX No STX register CR CR LF None ETX No of connected units Computer link slave Communication function Modem initialization General purpose serial communication Only in RUN mode Note1 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note2 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Note3 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction only Note4 Although it has adequate tolerance to noise it is recommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communication in case of communication errors occurred by excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive temporarily 6 5 COM port For L40MR and L60MR types ltem Description RS485 1 N communication ote Transmission distance Max 1200 m 19200 115200 bps Two wire half duplex transmission Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Shielded twisted pair cable or VCTF Transmission General purpose serial ASCII Binary code communication Communicati on format to be set by system Start
128. axes 1500 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1s based on in house oise Immunity l measurements AC power supply terminal Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Overvoltage category Category Il Pollution level Pollution level 2 L14 Approx 280 g L30 Approx 450 g L40 Approx 530 g 9 L60 Approx 730 g Note1 The tool port is not isolated from the internal digital circuit Note2 Cutoff current 5 mA Factory default setting o_o 2 2 Power supply specifications Item Specifications Rated voltage 100 to 240 V AC Voltage regulation range 85 to 264 V AC L14 35A or less at 240 V AC 25 C Inrush current L30 L40 L60 40A or less at 240 V AC 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals Internal power supply part 20 000 hours at 55 C Guaranteed life Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Service Power Supply for Input Output For L30 L40 L60 O ttem Specifications Note This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected it may lead to damages Unit s current consumption table Current consumption of power supply Unit type for Control unit 100 V AC 200 V AC AFPX L14R 100 mA or less 70 mA or less AFPX L30R 330 mA or less 210 mA or less
129. ay 63 Link register allocation Receive area Range of link registers used ae Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size Used Send area ee With the above settings the 28 words consisting of LD100 to Receive area LD127 can be used as internal registers Not used Internal relay 6 38 ACS ner Note Precautions When Allocating Link Areas If a mistake is made when allocating a link area be aware that an error will result and communication will be disabled Avoid overlapping send areas When sending data from a send area to the receive area of another PLC there must be a link relay and link register with the same number in the receive area on the receiving side In the example shown below there is an area between No 2 and No 3 which is overlapped and this will Cause an error so that communication cannot be carried out Example of link relay allocations Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 WLO No 1 Receive area gt gt gt Receive area Send area Overlap No 3 Receive area _ _ Send area 63 Set value of various control units Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission o l2 la Link relay transmission size Invalid allocations The allocations shown below are not possible neither for link relays nor for link registers System registers Send area is split Send area Receive area Send area Send and recei
130. ble for FP X0 L40 and L60 types only 14 50 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH neat WN E _ i reat Piso _ inteigentunt preap D o o rengent 9 2 x x 0 intelligent unit PREAD D intelligent unit i 7 Pal isi_lintetigentunt lpwer lume o fx fx fee x x 0 LO intelligent unit PWRT D unit eat a im ee Data read from RMRD S1 S2 n Reads the data from the ac e ananann slave station remote I O slave station Data write into RMWT 1 S2 n Writes the data into the intelligent e aca ll a slave station I O slave station a aa F156 Sampling trigger STRG When the trigger of this trace stops CADD 1 S2 D The time after S2 1 S2 PCADD elapses from the time of S1 2 Ea ee aa ee 141 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 gi i pale a D CSUB S1 S2 D The time that results from PCSUB subtracting S2 1 S2 from the A time S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored i in D 2 D 1 D Serial port MTRN S n D This is used to send data to an communication external device through the jalolalal A specified CPU COM port or MCU ei ye ee le ees COM port MCU serial port MRCV S D1 D2 Data is received from external reception PMRCV equipment via the COM port of 7 x x x x amp As 6 the specified MCU BIN arithmetic instruction BIN arithmetic instruction O S O F160 Double word DSQR S D square root High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e High speed MV S Performs high speed counter and cou
131. bps On the right side 19200 bps Tool port RS232C This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector IS used for the tool port on the control unit aN Signal Ground O O a OO AY Es f Receive Data RD Unit External device L aT ows O o So o O The followings are the default settings when the unit is shipped from the factory The system register should be used to change them Baud rate 9600bps Char Bit 8 bits Parity check Odd parity Stop bit bit Note The unit number of the tool port should be set by the system register Analog input connector L40R L40MR L60R and L60MR types Connector for connecting an analog input cable COM port terminal RS485 L40MR and L60MR types lt is connected for using RS485 communication Solderless terminals for M3 are used for connection As for the terminal unit short circuit the terminals of E and Service power supply for input L30R L40R L40MR L60R and L60MR types 24 VDC power supply that can be used for the input circuit is output Solderless terminals for M3 are used for connection Output circuit terminal block Terminals for output circuit Solderless terminals for M3 are used for connection q Expansion cover It is removed installed when installing the expansion cable and backup battery Input circuit terminal block Terminals for input circuit Solderless terminals for M3 are used for connection Power suppl
132. bus master via COM port Poe nll the MOD bus master type Il P146 of the MOD bus master type II Data receive RECV Receives the data to another station PRECV N D in the network MEWNET via link unit F145 Data send Sends the data to the slave station as P145 the MEWTOCOL master via COM port 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Sends the data to another station in the network MEWNET via link unit S S n Si S D N 1 S S1 S D N S1 S N D S1 S D N 1 S N D S1 S D N S1 S N D S D n n F146 Data receive RECV Receives the data from the slave station P146 as the MEWTOCOL master via COM port F147 Converts the ASCII code data in the outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D F149 Message S Displays the character constant of S in P149 display the connected programming tool Q Available X Not available Not available partially 2 This instruction is available for FPO V1 20 or later and FP e 3 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FP 32k type area starting with S for printing and F148 Self ERR Stores the self diagnostic error number P148 diagnostic PERR k100 n in DT9000 turns R9000 on and 3 error set to K299 turns on the ERROR LED 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 4 This instruction is available for FP X V2 50 or later and FP V3 20 or later s 5 Availa
133. card and executes it O Available lt Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for FPO Ver 2 0 or later and FP e U TI U v 70 14 43 FP2SH FP10SH exchange PXCH P16 aae PDXCH a ae o F17 Higher lower SWAP The higher byte and lower byte of D TE da a data exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH D1 D2 o the data between D1 and a Sas BS Sem EE Control instruction F19 Auxiliary jump SJP The program jumps to the label instruction specified by S and 3 x x x x x O O continues from there footie 2 Description rand Rie s fofolo E Binary arithmetic instructions 16 bit data S D Pao fanon pe O a addition PD 16 bit data S1 S2 S1 S2 D N a EA addition PD 16 bit data S D D a subtraction F27 16 bit data 1 2 S1 S2 D Pzr lumaon p of P28 subtraction D 16 bit data 1 S2 S1 X S2 gt D 1 D re feat pie multiplication aD Dat D D he a A a ander OT8018 7 Jofofefelelelo division aa SEE DT9015 5 gt 32 bit data D J S2 a 1 S2 1 S2 gt quotient D 1 e DT9016 DT9015 16 bit data m S1 X S2 gt D multiplication i result in 16 ots come P increment P 1 Beetle PO increment PD 1 semen ies decrement cence fey Eeen 32 bit data S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D multiplication
134. ce 1 The data sent from external devices is stored in the receive buffer 2 The reception done contact R9038 is turned on 3 The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DTO 4 The F159 MTRN instruction is executed with no data to clear the number of received bytes and to turn off the reception done contact R9038 The system is now ready to receive the next data The data in the receive buffer is not cleared Explanatory diagram Data register DT Felicidade Data reading Data reception l Reception done R9038 ON Reception ready R9038 0OFF External device 6 22 Data table Data sent from an external device connected to the communication port is stored in the data registers that have been set as the receive buffer The number of Data registers are used as the receive buffer Specify bytes received is stored in this area the data registers in system register 416 to 419 The number of bytes of data received is stored in the Reception data starting address of the receive buffer The initial value storage area f The circled numbers is 0 a Received data is stored in the received data storage area in order from the lower order byte Operation when receiving data When the reception done flag R9038 is off operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device The R9038 flag is off during the first
135. ceiving data is prohibited To receive the next data execute the F159 MTRN instruction and turn off the reception done flag R9038 to clear the number of received bytes to zero To receive data continuously without sending data clear the number of transmitted bytes to zero set n to KO and then execute the F159 MTRN instruction Binary communication Selecting STX not exist for the header and None for the terminator in the general purpose serial communication enables the binary communication Sending data Sends the data of bytes to be specified Receiving data Check the No of bytes received before the process At that time the reception done flag does not work 6 18 Data to be sent received with PLC Remember the following when accessing data in the send and receive buffers If a header has been chosen in the communication format settings the code STX H02 will automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent The data without the code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer and the reception done flag turns on when the terminator end code is received When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not work However if the code STX is added in the middle of the data the number of received byte is cleared to 0 and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again A terminator is automatically added to t
136. ck Calendar Function For L40 and L60 types 9 1 1 Clock Calendar Function The clock calendar function can be used when an optional backup battery is attached in the FP X0 L40 or L60 type control unit Note that this function cannot be used without the backup battery Specifications item Specifications Setting items Year month day hour 24 hour display minute second and day of week At 0 C less than 95 seconds per month Accuracy At 25 C less than 10 seconds per month At 55 C less than 130 seconds per month Area for clock calendar data With the clock calendar function data indicating the hour minute second day year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs A Available N A Available Special data register No Higher bytes Lower bytes Read Write Hour data Minute data CE HOO to H23 HOO to H59 Minute data Second data ewes H00 to H59 H00 to H59 Day data Hour data ee H01 to H31 H0O to H23 Year data Month data pete H0O to H99 H01 to H12 Day of the week data 9 1 2 Setting of Clock calendar Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Set PLC Date and Time under Tool on the menu bar The Set PLC Date and Time dialo
137. code STX NOSTX __ register Note2 5 Max 99 units AOO r Connecien Mulls Max 32 units when our C ENT adapter is connected Computer link master slave Modem initialization Communication function General purpose serial communication Modbus RTU Master Slave PC PLC link Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below p For baud rate 115 2 kbps A For baud rate 19 2 kbps Number of units stations 0 0 700 1200 Transmission distance m Note3 The settings of the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No 415 should be the same Only 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note5 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Factory default settings Port type Data length Parity Stopbt 9600 bits 8bits Odd tt COM port 115200 bits 8bits Odd bit aA Note If the potential difference between the power supplies of RS485 devices exceeds 4 V the unit may not communicate as it
138. ction is available for FP X V1 10 or later and FP 32k type 14 42 14 3 Table of High level Instructions The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high level instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on Instructions with the prefix P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected For the FPO FPOR FPX FP X the P type high level instructions are not available rand move pay move PMV Data transfer instructions pe lw fe eens Pfepleplo fete P1 move PDMV SN j 16 bit data MV S D invert and PMV S gt D 5 8 68 poet Re ee ole 32 bit data DMV S D n move Reading of GETS S The head word No of the specified slot is head word No PGETS read 5 x lx toc loc xla of the specified slot Bit data move BTM S n D The specified one bit in S is transferred to specified by n Hexadecimal The specified one digit in S is transferred 7Jolololofofo o digit 4 bit PDGT to the specified one digit in D The digitis 7 10 oo o D data move specified by n pere me eS fee gogoogog data move PMV2 D S2 gt D 1 i eee ee E data move PDMV2 D S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 aaa a ae e FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH U V TI NN F10 Block
139. d and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 x4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pom 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 1 6 82 7 82ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 7 82 x 16 4 32 1 130 44 ms Calculation example 2 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 x 4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 16 4 32 5 198 44 ms 6 42 Calculation example 3 When all but one station have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been allocated evenly and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 15 4 13 ms Tik 0 96 400 0 67 5 407 ms Note The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 15 4 13 5 407 593 43 ms Calculation example 4 When all stations have been added to an 8 unit link the larges
140. d contact e O paste eee Leading x RTOLPEe Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is A detected ili x RToLPRe Begins a logic operation only for one scan I N when the trailing edge of the trigger is 2 X gt 5 Oloo detected aa Eueteb AE o om A norm x TR cli 2 xJols g ofofo serially only for one scan when the leading 2 Xj olalo edge of the trigger is detected Pile oa eRe LEE setae ious A norm ally a oie eee tte serially only for one scan when the trailing 2 x wile O 8 B edge of the trigger is detected e Connects a Form A normally open contact in emer parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected 2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in Ate aw parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected oTt P Outputs the operated result to the specified Y output only for one scan when leading edge of x 5 the trigger is detected for pulse relay Outputs the operated result to the specified nJ output only for one scan when trailing edge of x the trigger is detected for pulse relay Alterna YR LE Inverts the output condition on off each time woe ee the leading edge of the trigger is detected Ad tetetstet Connects the multiple instruction blocks ial ial tre HH Connects the multiple instruction blocks in pram p EET prre TT oloololole O Available Not availabl
141. diagram Data register DT 1 The characters are converted to ASCII code and the data is stored in the send buffer 2 Data transmission using F159 MTRN bem wm www wm we wm we wm we wm ewe we ew ee ee eee eww www wee em External device 6 20 Explanation of data table The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S At the beginning of transmission the number of bytes to be transmitted Is set 0 is set on completion of transmission Transmitted data storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of transmission Stn Use an FO MV or F95 ASC instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data storage area specified in S Operation when sending data When the execution condition of the F159 MTRN instruction turns on and the transmission done flag R9039 is on operation is as follows 1 N is preset in S The reception done flag R9038 is turned off and the reception data number is cleared to Zero 2 The set data is transmitted in order from the lower order byte in S 1 of the table During transmission the transmission done flag R9039 turns off If system register No 413 is set to header start code with STX the header is automatically added to the beginning of the data The terminator end code specified in system register 413 is automatically added to the end of the data DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104
142. dicates 12 5 ms The mask conditions of interrupts using the Mask condition instruction can be stored here Monitor using monitoring binary display DT90025 register for 15_13 11 7 3 0 Bit No interrupts Lo no aa INTO to 7 0 peated disabled i lia 1 Interrupt enabled DT90026 Notused f CNA NA Periodical The value set by ICTL instruction is stored DT90027 interrupt interval KO periodical interrupt is not used A N A INT24 K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s DT90028 Sample trace KO Sampling by the SMPL instruction interval K1 to K3000 x 10 ms 10 ms to 30 s DT90029 Notused SSN NA Note1 Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time In PROG mode the scan time for the operation is not displayed The maximum and minimum values are cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG Note2 It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan Note3 As DT90020 is renewed even if FO MV DT90020 and D instruction is being executed it can be used to measure the block time 14 22 A Available N A Not available ates name sin Rm The contents of the specified message Data DT90032 Character storage by length are stored in these special data DT90033 F149 MSG instruction registers when F149 MSG instruction is DT90034 executed DT90035 DT90036 Not used _ _ The number of data that match the searched pt90037 ork for SRC data is stored her
143. dly perform only reception specify KO To receive subsequent data you must execute the F159 R9038 also turns off when transmission is MTRN instruction to turn off the reception done flag performed with a byte number specification R9038 alll Note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program 6 23 6 5 5 Flag Operation in Serial Communication Header No STX Terminator CR Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows para eosed n 8 6 n 0 from external device Cannot be stored when reception done flag is ON Reception done i OFF flag R9038 Duplex transmission ON disabled while F159 MTRN is being F159 MTRN executed OFF instruction ON Transmission OFF done flag R9039 execution ik Transmitted data Stored Receive buffer E ea ES Ap ft imi f i Ca E Hi Number of bytes lt 41 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 0 gt lt 1 gt received is cleared when F159 MTRN received Write pointer Kaber of byies instruction is
144. ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm or more PLC unit 50 mm or more e Maintain at least 100mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit 100 mm or more __ Panel door PLC unit Other device e Leave at least 100mm of space opean from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring 5 3 5 1 2 Installation and Removal Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail Can be simply attached to DIN rail Procedure of installation method 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal method 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull the attachment lever downwords 3 Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail 5 4 5 2 Expansion Method 5 2 1 How to Connect With FP X Expansion Unit The expansion unit is connected to the control unit with an exclusive expansion cable The expansion cable AFPX EC08 is packaged with the expansion unit and expansion FPO adapter The expansion cables AFPX EC30 AFPX EC80 are sold separately How to connect The procedure is as follows Remove the expansion cover Fit the expansion cable into
145. e Not available partially 1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when X1280 Y1120 R1120 including special internal relay L1280 T256 or C256 is specified by ST ST OT AN AN OR or OR instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses For the FP FP X and FP XO the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH 14 35 Stores the operated result up to this instruction 2 Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction 2 Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge DF Turns on the contact for only one differential scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Leading edge Turns on the contact for only one differential scan when the leading edge of the initial trigger is detected The leading edge execution a fount is possible on the first scan ae peenem e ols fols elas Otetaan is set to and held at off Saa l at set trigger and holds until reset turns on bs On delay timer After set value n x 0
146. e ed OFF Count Two phase input mode increment input CW oS LELEL PL X2 ON x tJ ct L LI Lor X3 Count 0 1 2 ont n lt lt ___ _ _ _ Decrement inputCCW o SLE ers Le Se X2 OFF 2 ES oe ee ee eee a a pe OFF BEE count n et 2 ws 7 6 gao aea e Kom a ae cal n Incremental decremental input mode xo ON X2 OFF ON At OFF X3 Decreasing Increasing Increasing Decreasing Direction discrimination x0 z ON yoy ft ELE LL LE LE LE L___ ore ON X1 OFF Increasing Decreasing o gt Count for reset input Incremental input mode XO 7 X1 X2 X3 FUL Grr X4 X5 X6 X7 o ebef e fele bee count is prohibited The reset input is executed by the interruption at 1 on edge and 2 off edge 1 on edge Count disable Elapsed value clear 2 off edge Count enable DT90052 bit2 able disable setting of the input can be set by the reset input 7 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required lt Single phase gt lt Two phase gt T gt a e TT 2 2 Ler 7 3 4 VO Allocation As shown in the table in the previous section 7 2 1 the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used The output turned on and
147. e when F96 SRC Instructions l o insturction is executed The position of the first matching data is DT90038 MONK TOF HG stored here when an F96 SRC instruction is Instructions executed DT90039 Notused CCNA NAA Analog input 0 A NA NAN Volume input The potentiometer value KO to K1000 is a stored here pT90041 Analog input 1 Volume input DT90042 Notused h CNA NAA DT90043 Notused f SNA NAA Analog input 0 Thermister voltage input The converted values 0 to 1024 of Analog input 1 thermister input and voltage input are stored DT90045 Thermister voltage A N A input Notused f CNA CNA Notused T NA NAA DT90052 14 23 po A Clock calendar monitor pee hour minute gt For L40 L60 Clock calendar monitor DT 4 999 minute second gt For L40 L60 Clock calendar monitor DT90055 day hour gt For L40 L60 Clock calendar monitor ee year month gt For L40 L60 Clock calendar monitor eee day of the week gt For L40 L60 14 24 A Available N A Not available ore Read Writ Description t i ing ing Hour and minute data of the clock calendar are stored here This data is read only data It cannot be overwritten Higher byte Lower byte _ ie ra Hourdata Minute data HOO to H23 HOO to H59 The year month day hour minute second and day of the week data for the clock calendar is stored The built in clock calendar will ope
148. ea while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value will be output K10 4 2 50 R KS Ke OK Ko KIO Ki Ki2 K3 Ki4 KIS 7 35 7 36 Chapter 8 Security Functions 8 1 Password Protect Function 8 1 1 Password Protect Function This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a password on the FPOR There are two ways to set a password as below 1 Sets using the programming tool 2 Sets using an instruction SYS1 instruction Characters usable for password Digit number of password Usable characters 4 digit password 4 characters of the following 16 characters 0 to 9 and A to F can be used 8 digit password A maximum of 8 one byte characters case sensitive and symbols can be used ACS Note Precautions on the password setting Do not forget your password If you forget your password you cannot read programs Even if you ask us for your password we cannot crack it 8 1 2 Setting using Programming Tool Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Security information dialog box Set PLC Password Untitle1 Indicates the cur
149. eeeees 7 6 LA USS OUTDO UL Funcion is secre elitist cela alent Ok eel 7 14 FO PWM OUTDUL FPURCTION cerere iona ee ae e Rebeeeoaneesancee 7 35 SECUPILY FUNCUON S ae ete 8 1 8 1 P ssw rd Protect FUNCU ON sieckessciis eskae a e aN 8 2 8 2 Upload Protectio N semeei an b a a 8 8 8 3 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader cccceccecseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeens 8 9 8 4 Table of Security SettingS CANCel cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeesaeees 8 12 Oer FUNC U ONS reni dod ee naddade ua adennaencces 9 1 9 1 Clock Calendar Function For L40 and L60 types ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 2 9 2 Sampling Trance Function For L40 and L60 types ceeeeseeeeeeeeees 9 4 9 3 Time Constant PrOCSSSING einan aie dsbaeld aieesedeneer E 9 7 94 P13 PICWT lMSiUCHON i sceiein steed teen tiers aeSeedoninlaicddadanec aie ent 9 8 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ccccsseeceeeeceeseeeeseeseneeseeneesees 10 1 10 1 Self DiagnOstic FUNCTION sierosa i EN 10 2 10 2 FFOUDISSOOUNNG sonnii a 10 3 103 Operation ENO nene a a a tee cat cen Sach col cache 10 7 Precautions During Programming cccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeneeenseeeeeeneeenens 11 1 11 1 Use of Duplicated Output Double Coil cc ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 2 11 2 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method cccecseeeeeeeeeees 11 4 11 3 Precautions for Programming ccccseccssecseeeeeeceeeseeeseeeceeeceeeneeenenen
150. ees 11 7 11 4 Rewrite Function During RUN ccccececseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeenaes 11 8 11 5 Processing During Forced Input and Output ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 13 SPEC CIIG ANOINS arci a a a 12 1 12 1 TaBe Ol SPCCIICATIONS araa ao ictal Go a eee ae 12 2 12 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constantts ccccceececeeeecseeeeeeeeeseeeesaaees 12 9 Dimensions and Cable Specifications c cccsseeceeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeseneenes 13 1 to DIMENSION S sissies es eae eu as ore clare lol taka es lee 13 2 13 2 Cable Adapter Specifications cccccccssececseecseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeas 13 3 pa e751 916 by sr CERISE re eR a ona ene ee ee 14 1 14 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 14 2 14 2 Table of Basic INStruCtiONS ccccccccseecceeecceeeceeeceueeceeeaeeesauseseeesees 14 35 14 3 Table of High level INStrUCTIONS ccccceeceseeeceeeseeeeceeeeseeeseeeesaeeeaes 14 43 14 4 Table of Error codes ceacciccvsacsiactadanadsicnasechaiasiwenesennebenesadslsaeesnedeemabnaeste 14 63 14 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands ccseeeeeeeeeeees 14 76 14 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD ccccccceecccececeeeeseesaeeeseeeeaeesaeesaueeseeeaes 14 77 TAT PO Gl COGS S ra Sianne sou pieced tea iva hat tame 14 78 Difference in Specifications Between FP X0O Models The following tables show the main differences between each FP X0 models Check t
151. eleration started by near home input has been completed If the leading edge of home input off to on is detected during the operation at a creep speed after the deceleration operation the pulse output stops Speed Near home Home P input ON input ON Max speed Initial speed OHz gt Home input is effective only after deceleration has been completed 1 24 The explanation below shows the case that home return is performed with the following conditions Initial speed 1 kHz Target speed 5 KHz Creep speed 500Hz Acceleration time 300 ms Deceleration time 500 ms Example of timing chart Acceleration time Deceleration time Frequency 300ms 500ms Target speed 5kHz Initial speed 1kHz Creep speed 500Hz Home return start R20 i During home return R200 Home return start pulse R201 i Home return complete R202 _ Near home input X0 ee ee ee Home input X4 Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Data table pale Serunaitent Unite ies ae E Settable range register No program Home return type 1 Operation mode Reverse Set according to the control code ewe POOL pag CW CCW on the next page H1001 0010 a K1 to K20000 L14 L30 type DT202 Initial speed Hz K1000 K1 to K50000 L40 L60 type K1 to K20000 L14 L30 type DT204 Target speed Hz K5000 K1 to K50000 L40 L60 type DT206 Acceleration time ms K300 K1 to K82760 DT208 Deceleration
152. er has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 6 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses For the FP FP X and FP X0O the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number 14 36 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Symbol Description F118 l Increments or decrements from the UDC preset value S based on up down input gal Shift register Die RWAN Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal M relay WR data to the left Raast Left right F119 VR rii9uRsR Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range shift register LRSR ats specified by D1 and D2 to the left or rr m to the right Shift D2 Control instructions Master Ends the master control program MCE n control relay end C CE Jump Label P The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there LBL LBL BL Master M Starts the master control program control relay m nH Master control area Es J F19 The program jumps to the label SJP instruction specified by S and continues from there Loop Label LOOP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S L Break Stops program e
153. ested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed There are two kinds of control method which are type 0 and type 1 Operation modes of JOG operation There are two operation modes for the JOG operation which are type 0 and type 1 Those operation specifications for the specified target value differ Type 0 Regardless of the settings for the target value the JOG operation is performed when the trigger is on l l Pulse output i instruction flag i R9120 E i Trigger Time Deceleration stop starts Deceleration stop starts when the trigger is off when the trigger is off Type 1 Even if the trigger is on the deceleration stop is performed according to the settings of the target value Pulse output l i instruction flag R9120 Lo Trigger Targe value Specified No of pulses Time Deceleration stop starts according to the settings of the target value The explanation below shows the case that pulses are output from YO when using forward rotation and Y1 when using reverse rotation with the following conditions Initial speed 1 kHz Target speed 7kHz Acceleraiton time 100 ms Deceleration time 100 ms Example of timing chart Acceleration time Deceleration time Frequency 7 100ms 100ms Target speed 7kHz Initial speed 1kHz JOG operation signal R30 F172 instruction execution Pulse
154. evices and mechanical power apparatus Breaker Isolation transformer ACS Note Power supply of the expansion units Be sure to supply power to the expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both The same wiring system Turn on off simultaneously Gonid unit To avoid the influence of noises Use the power supply causing less noise The inherent noise resistance is sufficient for the noise Superimposed on the power wires however the noise can be attenuated further by using the isolation transformer Also twist the power supply cables to minimize adverse effects from noise Grounding Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding e For gounding purposes use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Q e The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device C CORRECT x INCORRECT Other device Other device Inverter etc Inverter etc PLC 5 3 2 Service Power Supply for Input For L30 L40 and L60 types Service power supply for input Use it for input and the expansion FPO adapter Use an external power supply for the FPO FPOR expansion unit When
155. following measures are recommended e Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode e Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized Note In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also have the input output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together Use an exclusive ground for each device The terminal block cover must be used for preventing electric shock 5 8 2 Momentary Power Failures Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 10 ms the FP XO control unit continues to operate If the power is off for 10 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset Although the duration of the power failure for the expansion FPO adapter is 10 ms judge the permissible time for the system after confirming the permissible duration of the power failure for the DC power supply that supplies power to the expansion FPO adapter Supply the power to it from the service power supply for the input of the FP X0O control unit When using the expansion unit with a built in power supply E380 expansion FPO adapter
156. for timer and counter gt For L40 L60 Hold type area starting number 7 setting for internal relays gt For L40 L60 Hold type area starting number setting for data registers gt For L40 L60 Hold or non hold setting for step ladder process gt For L40 L60 Previous value is held for a leading edge detection instruction DF instruction with MC Hold type area starting word No for PC PLC link relay For PC PLC link 0 gt For L40 L60 Hold type area starting word No for PC PLC link relay For PC PLC link 1 gt For L40 L60 Hold type area starting word No for PC PLC link register For PC PLC link 0 gt For L40 L60 Hold type area starting word No for PC PLC link register For PC PLC link 1 gt For L40 L60 Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 Action on Timeout setting for SEND RECV RMRD RMWT commands Time setting Constant value settings for scan time Sianing numbering torconar 2 ee J L40 160 1008 L40 L60 0 to 1024 C a e 28 6 64 j Fumes Or ENADE SENGON Disabled Disabled Enabled duplicated output Operation RUNO WEMAN Stop Stop Continuation of operation verification error occurs peal Sen WEMAN Stop Continuation of operation operation error occurs Wait time setting for multi frame 2600 0 ms 4 to 32760 ms communication 10000 0 ms 10 to 81900 ms Normal scan 0 Normal scan 0 to 600 ms Scans once each specified time interval Note1 Data is retained o
157. g box is displayed Set PLC Date and Time dialog box Set PLC Date and Time Untitlel a PLO Home Date Svy mim dd OK m Cancel Time hh immss Help Te o 3 Enter the date and time and click the OK button rit 9 2 Setting and changing using program 1 The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 which are allocated as the clock calendar setting area are sent 2 A value of H8000 is written to DT90058 Note The value can be sent using the differential instruction DF or by changing H8000 to HOOOO Do not always write H8000 Example Writing the date and time Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on ey eevee trees a a at ey ch eee cet gees a cee DF H Fo MV HO DT 90054 f a Set 0 minutes and 0 seconds Fo Mv H512 DT90055 Set 12th hour Sth day Fo MV H 8000 DT 90059 ee rr S Set the time Oe IES er Note No values have been set in the default settings so the programming tool or another means must be used to specify the values Example Using the clock calendar Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start In the example shown here the clock calendar function is used to output Y0 signal for one second at 8 30 a m every day Here the Hour minute data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time Pa a a cre es
158. g Communication Parameters Settings for baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click the COM Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Configuration Untitle1 Hold on hold 1 Hald Non hald 2 No410 Unite 1 No473 Communication Format Action on Error Time Mo412 Comm Mode Char Bit E Bits ka ADCEUS ATU Parity Odd Controller input settings HSC Stop Bit Controller output settings PLS PYM Interrupt pulse catch settings CR Interrupt edge settings STS not exist Time constant setting 1 of CPU input nok exist Time constant setting 2 of CPU input No415 Baudrate 115200 bps hi Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input LE0R Only 0 Tool Port 7048 Cancel Bead PLC Initialize Help No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Click on and select MODBUS RTU link No 413 Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port The terminator and header cannot be changed Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminat
159. g box and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 10 2 2 If ERR LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been activated Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on If the ERR LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality in the control unit Please contact your dealer If the ERR LED flashes refer to chapter 10 2 1 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode If the ERR LED is turned on the program execution time is too long Check the program Check Check if instructions such as JMP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan never finish Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession 10 2 3 ALL LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the control unit is in the range of the rating Be sure to check the fluctuation of the voltage Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the control unit is shared with them If the LED on the control unit turns on at this moment increase the capacity of the power supply or prepare another power supply for other devices Please contact your dealer for further questions 10 4 10 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Proceed from the check of the o
160. g order the largest word is first Scaling of real FSCAL S1 S2 Scaling linearization on a real number data number data table is performed and calculated Q Available Not available Not available partially 3 J 3 S1 S2 The total value and the mean value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained The total value is stored in the D 1 D and the mean value is i to 1 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 3 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 14 61 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope Boolean p Description rand Time series processing instruction PID processing S PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 and the result is stored in the S 3 Easy PID S1 S2 Temperature control PID can be S3 S4 easily performed using the image of a temperature controller Compare instructions F373 16 bit data DTR S D If the data in the 16 bit area P373 revision PDTR specified by S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution F374 32 bit data DDTR S D If the data in the 32 bit area P374 revision PDDTR specified by S 1 S has c
161. g point type EXP S EXP S 1 S gt D 1 D data exponent PEXP Floating point type LOG S D LOG S 1 S gt D 1 D data logarithm PLOG Floating point type data square root 16 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion 32 bit integer data to floating point type data conversion Floating point type data to 16 bit integer conversion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data Floating point type data to 32 bit integer conversion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data V T U T Sg Sg co NN Floating point type PWR a S2 S S1 data power PPWR PFSQR FLT S PFLT DFLT S D PDFLT INT S D PINT DINT S D PDINT S2 1 S2 gt V S 1 S S gt D 1 D Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified by S 1 S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Q Available lt Not available
162. g the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D The decimal part of the real number data specified in S 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in The decimal part of the real number data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by S 1 S and the result absolute value is stored in D 1 D The data in degrees of an angle specified in S 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees and the result is stored in D 1 D S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 R900A on S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later 14 60 FPX FP2SH FP10SH FP2SH FP10SH o i rand Floating point FLIMT S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 type data PFLIMT S3 D S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D upper
163. h the unit The wiring should be shorther than 3 m When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Make sure stress is not applied to the cable Confirm the cable is connected properly before supplying power 2 4 3 Potentiometer Input Connect a potentiometer to the analog input connector externally Values change in response to the turn of the potentiometer Circuit diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Do not connect anything with the 5 6 and 7 8 pins se Min potentiomeneter resistance should be 5 kQ Y AA Example Writing of the clock setting value The value of the special data register DT90040 that corresponds to the analog input CHO is sent to the set value area SVO of TMXO to set the time for the clock R9010 Fo MV DT 90040 svo Data transfer command 1 The value of the special data register DT90040 is transferred to the timer set value area 0 1 s type timer Set K999 for the set value as a dummy RO p 0 K999 2 9 2 4 4 Thermister Input Connect a thermister and resistor to the analog input connector externally to load the change in the resistance values of thermistor as analog input values Circuit diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Do not connect anything with the 5 6 and 7 8 pins It is recommended to use approx 2 kQ as external resistance External resistance Thermister Thermister resistance and digital conversion value
164. hanged detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution Index register bank processing instructions Setting the SETB n Index register 10 to ID bank index register PSETB number change over bank number Changing the CHGB n Index register 10 to ID bank index register PCHGB number change over with bank number remembering preceding bank number Restoring the POPB Changes index register 10 to ID index register oll bank number back to the bank bank number before F411 CHGB P41 1 PCHGB instruction File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change register bank roo o over number Changing the CBFL n File register bank number change file register poo over with remembering preceding bank number bank number Restoring the PBFL Changes file register bank number file register Pre back to the bank before F415 bank number CBFL P415 PCBEL instruction Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FPO V2 1 or later only 2 This instruction is available for FP X V 1 20 or later and FP 32k type 14 62 14 4 Table of Error codes Difference in ERROR display There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model Display Display method FP2 FP2SH ERROR Continually lit FP FP0 FPOR
165. hannel and with the same parameter after executing calculation only The quick start is enabled when the parameters are the same except output Duty cycle of pulse output Common to F171 F172 F174 F175 F177 Pulses are output with a 25 duty cycle 7 34 7 5 PWM Output Function 7 5 1 Overview PWM output function With the F173 PWMH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained 7 5 2 Instruction to be Used for PWM Output Function PWM Output Instruction F173 In the program below while X6 is on a pulse with a period of 1 ms and duty ratio of 50 is output from YO of specified channel CHO X6 H Fo MV K13 DT100 i Control code K13 1 0 kHz a period of 1 ms FO MV K500 DT101 Duty K500 50 F173 PWMH DT 100 KO Output from YO of CHO Data table DT100 Control code 1 K13 DT101 Duty 2 50 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Control code Frequency Hz Period ms 166 67 6 166 67 133 33 12 5 80 00 25 40 00 50 20 00 100 10 00 200 200 5 00 00 00 00 A ALA O1 ee A N A co A O N O1 Kt 1 67 K12 800 1 25 K13 1 0k 1 00 K14 1 2k 0 833 K15 1 6k 0 625 2 Specify the duty by setting the K constant Duty KO to K1000 1000 resolutions Note When a value out of the settable range is written in the control code an operation error will occur If a value out of the settable range is written to the duty ar
166. hase individual or direction discrimination mode the settings of CH1 or CH3 in system register No 400 and the settings of CH5 in No 401 are invalid Note2 When the reset input settings are overlapped each setting of CH1 in system register No 400 and CH3 in No 401 has priority Note3 When system registers Nos 400 to 403 are set for the same input contact simultaneously the priority order is as follows 1 High speed counter 2 Pulse catch 3 Interrupt input When the high speed counter is used in the incremental input mode specifying XO as interrupt input or pulse catch input will be invalid and XO will be activated as the counter input of the high speed counter 14 6 Add ene ress Pulse PWM output settings YO Y1 X5 gt For L14 Pulse PWM output settings YO to Y3 X5 X7 gt For L30 L40 L60 Controller output settings Pulse PWM Pulse catch input settings Interrupt Interrupt input settings p O c lt oO ry S 2N A Interrupt edge setting for controller input Interrupt edge settings CHO Normal output CHO Normal output CH1 Normal output Not set Leading edge Normal output YO Y1 Pulse output YO Y1 Pulse output YO Y1 Home inputX5 PWM output Y0 Normal output Y1 Normal output YO Y1 Pulse output YO Y1 Pulse output YO Y1 Home input X5 PWM output Y0 Normal output Y1 Normal output Y2 Y3 Pulse ou
167. he end of the data being sent There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer Sending data Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is Example The data 12345 is transmitted as an ASCII code to an external device 1 Data sent using the F95 ASC instruction should be converted to ASCII code data Conversion to ASCII code 1 2 3 4 5 Data to be transmitted ib Conversion to ASCII code H 31 32 33 34 35 Coded data 1 2 3 4 5 2 lf DT 100 is being used as the start address of send buffer data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register DT101 in two byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte DT103 DT102 DT101 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upper byte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 Receiving data The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data Example The data 12345 is transmitted from a device with RS232C port lf DT200 is being used as the receive buffer received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201 in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte DT203 DT202 DT201 Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 6 19 6 5 3 Sending Data Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT a
168. he memory during the replacement of the battery 2 Turn off the power supply When the power is off supply the power to the control unit for more than five minutes to charge the built in capacitor to back up the memory during the replacement of the battery 3 Remove the expansion cover located at the surface of the control unit 4 Remove the used battery 5 Install a new battery within two minutes after turning off the power 6 Install the expansion cover If the power is not sufficiently supplied or it takes too much time to replace the battery retained memory data may be lost 5 7 4 Lifetime and Time for Replacement of Backup Battery Battery lifetime Type of control unit Battery lifetime Suggested replacement interval L40 L60 Note1 The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied Note2 Note that the lifetime may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions Note3 The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even when power is supplied The lifetime is about twice as long as that when no power is supplied Detection of battery error and time for replacement Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops Create a program to announce errors to the outside as necessary When the system register No 4 Battery Error Alarm is enabled the ERR LED of the control unit will flash Although data will be retained for about a week after
169. he real number and stores it as integer data DT72 DT73 to DT70 DT71 R80 c F313 F 1000000 DT62 DT72 F178 Pulse cycle Execution condition F332 DROFF DT72 DT70 Stores the elapsed value at the time of measurement as the previous value DT66 DT67 to DT68 DT69 R9010 F1 omv DT66 DT68 7 3 6 High speed counter control flag Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the high speed counter Allocation and role of high speed counter control flag When a high speed counter instructions F166 F167 F178 is executed the high speed counter control flag of the corresponding channel is ON No other high speed counter instruction can be executed as long as this flag is ON The high speed counter control flags are allocated to each channel Channel No High speed counter control flag R9110 ROT CH2 R9112 CH3 R9113 Operation of high speed counter control flag The high speed counter flag varies during scanning Replace it with an internal relay at the beginning of the program when using it several times in the program 7 12 Sample Program Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example PLC Input terminal Conveyor p z A Motor Encoder input Operation start se Encoder C Output terminal Inverter Inverter operation Operation Stop Operation chart I O allocation I O No Description XO Encoder inp
170. hem If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 The prioriry order for unit number settings is as follows 1 SYS1 insturction 2 System registers o PP G FP X0 Max 16 units f FP X0 FP X0 FP X0 RS485 6 33 6 6 3 Setting Communication Parameters PC PLC Link Settings for baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click the COM Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Configuration Untitle1 Ho410 Unit No 1 Mo ti2 Comm Mode Controller input settings HSC Controller output settings PLS Prah Interrupt pulse catch settings STs not exist 115200 bps Time constant setting 4 of CPL ee LB0R Only Tool Port 2046 Cancel Bead PLC Initialize Help No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 16 No 412 Communication Mode Click on v and select PC Link 3 Key Point When using a PC PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed No Name i Set Value Communication format Char bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop bit 1 bit
171. hin the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing Keep the height below 2000m For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas E xcessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges e Min 100mm or less Static electricity Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Measures regarding heat discharge e Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat Upside down Horizontal installation Installation getting of PLC main unit the DIN rail upright e Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters transformers or large scale resistors 5 2 Installation space e Leave at least 50mm of space between the wiring
172. hose differences thoroughly before use e een of hardware specifications Pp 4 Lo GeO Sonic power sor power supply for 24VDC03A 24VDC0 3A_ 24VDC0 3A 14 points 30 points 40 points 60 points Control DC input 8 DC input 16 DC input 24 DC input 32 unit Relay output 4 Relay output 10 Relay output 12 Relay output 24 Tr output 2 Tr output 4 Tr output 4 Tr output 4 No of controllable I O points Expansion Cannot becinieced Max 3 units unit Max 90 points for expansion units Analog input x 2 points One of the followings can be input to the terminal block of the control unit or they can be connected in Analog input None combination 1 Connect potentiometer 2 Connect thermister 3 Input voltage O to 10V Geatmedoay o N0 fun None Built in Realtime clock Can be installed 1 Operation memory can be set whether to be held or not by system registers 2 Clock calendar realtime clock function can be used Backup of operaiton Counter 6 points Counter 16 points memory to F ROM when Internal relay 80 points Internal relay 128 points power is cut off Data register 300 words Data register 302 words Backup battery Cannot be installed n of communication interfaces L14 L30 L40 L60 L40M L60M ey ee RS232C Tool port MEWTOCOL slave MEWTOCOL slave L14 L30 118 bytes frame 2k bytes frame L40 L60 2k bytes frame General purpose serial
173. ic operation by comparing two 32 compare L bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S241 2 Start STFs ae Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 E SLS bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 point a a S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S141 S1 S2 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 STF S1 g gic Op y paring 7 r52 1 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S24 1 S2 Z 7 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 oie bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S141 1 S2 1 S2 Floating ne tore Connects a Form A normally open contact B rf 5 52 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the point type comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S27 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact x O jA1 At1 O x x l serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in oe Connects a Form A normally open contact in je x oforfonfo x x EP pese 52 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the x O jatilan l O x Xx comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORF gt Connects a Form A normally open contac
174. ick the OK button 8 4 How to permit access with password 1 Select Tool gt Set PLC Password in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed Set PLC Password Untitle1 Eaj Current status 8 digits Protect Close Available ret counts 3 counts Sees digit number a Help f 4 digits Hex f 8 digits alphanumernc Match case Operation Mode f Protect f Unprotect a digits password Enter in alphanumeric okok Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Set the items in the table below and click on the Settings button Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Access 4 digits or 8 digits Input the set password Once access is permitted the following message is displayed FPWIN GR A PLC became enabled to write read 3 Click the OK button le 8 Note If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off when the access is permitted the PLC will be password protected again 8 5 How to cancel the password protection Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified All programs are retained All programs are deleted The upload protection setting is also deleted Erases all programs and security information to Force cancel cancel the setting forcibly How
175. ied number of delay and then stop the sampling operation Once the sampling operation stops the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart For the initial settings number of samples 1000 number of delay 100 the number of samples before and after the trigger point is 900 and 1000 respectively 9 4 Operation image of sampling trace Trace memory in PLC 1 sampling data Back to the biginning if exceeding the area if FPWIN GR Untitle1 2 Monitoring Time Chart ij File View Online Settings Option Help x Slaj l Sf mm 2l vo Comment Remark FP2 16K Online PLC REMOTE RUN Monitor stopping Home FREE Sampling Times 1000 Times Sampling Rate 100ms Delay Tames 1o Tines Elan Monitor configuration Sampling data display Data entry E Time Scale O cC O R er e ee 100ms Ons 1000ms 1000ms 2000ms 1000ms 2000ms F F Cursor information i la Online Offline s Setting Scale Monitor un Pro lt gt ie gt lt Ready NUM Z 1 Sampling at regular time intervals 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to TRACE Set the sampling rate time Sampling Configurations Cancel
176. ilt in Flash ROM without backup battery Program capacity 2 5k steps 2 5k steps No of Basic 114 instruction High level 230 Up to 3k steps From 0 08 us step by basic instruction From 0 32 us step by high level instruction MV instruction From 3k steps From 0 58 us step by basic instruction From 1 62 us step by high level instruction MV instruction Base time 0 15ms 0 18 ms 0 31 to 0 35 ms or 0 34 to 0 39 ms or less less With E16 0 4 ms x No of units I O refresh base time With E30 0 5 ms x No of units With expansion FPO adapter 1 4 ms FPO expansion unit refresh time From 0 08 us step by basic instruction Operation speed From 0 32 us step by high level instruction MV instruction Note6 256 points 1024 points gt Ed for initial setting Timer 250 points TO for initial setting Timer 1008 points X to T249 Counter 6 points C250 to TO to T1007 Counter 16 points Timer Counter T C C255 C1008 to C1023 S Timer can count up to in units of 1ms Timer can count up to in units of 1ms w 10ms 100ms or 1s x 32767 10ms 100ms or 1s x 32767 a Counter Can count up to 1 to 32767 Counter Can count up to 1 to 32767 y 3 Special data register ABO words powod 5 DT 5 12 4 L14 L30 L40 L60 Comment storage All comments including I O comments explanatory notes interlinear comments can be stored Backup battery is not necessar
177. in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode WR907 FP X0O Description Turns on when Unit No 1 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode R9070 R9071 Turns on when Unit No 2 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Names ee Turns on when Unit No 3 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode Poe Turns on when Unit No 4 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode i Turns on when Unit No 5 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode a Turns on when Unit No 6 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 Is in the RUN mode No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode MEWNET Wo Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode PC PLC link Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode 0 operation Turns on when Unit No 9 Is in the RUN mode mode relay Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 10 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode
178. in the unit number 07 from the COM port 3 Reads the data No H7788 in the unit number 07 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM port 6 53 6 54 Chapter 7 High speed Counter Pulse Output and PWM Output Functions 7 1 Overview of Each Functions 7 1 1 Three Pulse Input Output Functions There are three pulse I O functions built into the FP X0 High speed counter function PLC The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired output Encoder output is input to the high speed counter Roller Motor Encoder STOP signal Tape lead wire Pulse output function Stepping motor Combined with a commercially available motor PLC Pulse output CW Servo motor driver the function enables positioning control ii r 0 With the exclusive instruction you can perform Pulse output CCW repe AAN trapezoidal control home return and JOG Pulse output CW operation Pulse output CCW seca UUL Stepping motor Servo motor PWM output function When you increase the pulse width By using the exclusive instruction the PWM output AAJ function enables a pulse output of the desired duty L VVV ratio N n n Heating increases When you decrease it Ww JLL Heating decreases 7 1 2 Performance of Buil
179. ing P General purpose communications Selection of modem Disabled Enabled Disabled Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Ata lanath Parity check none with odd with even ae Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits bit 8 bits ae _ The following setting is valid only when Parity check ee 6 Te i the communication mode specified by with odd h Stop bit 1 bit system register 412 as been set to l General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist oe 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Communication format setting O c p p u O Q O O received buffer of general serial data Starting address for 0 to 2499 communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 128 0 to 128 serial data communication mode 14 8 Default a Unit No setting 1 to 99 Computer link Communication Romaulerliok General purpose serial communication mode setting p PC PLC link MODBUS RTU Selection of modem Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even a bit 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Communication Parity check Ii The following setting is valid only when format setting Odd the communication mode specified by St bins aay system register 412 has been
180. ink and the operation error flags R9007 and R9008 will turn on The operation error code E45 is set at special data register DT90000 The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 Types of operation error 1 Address error The memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used 2 BCD data error Operation is attempted on non BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range 3 Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data the specified data is outside the possible range 4 Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range 10 3 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs Normally the operation stops when an operation error occurs When you set system register 26 to continuation the control unit operates even if an operation error Occurs Using FPWIN GR 1 Set the mode of the CPU to RPOG 2 Select the Option in PLC Configuration option from the menu bar 3 On the PLC Configuration menu select Action on error This displays system registers 20 to 26 4 Remove the check of system register 26 5 Press the OK to write the setting to the PLC Using FPWIN Pro 1 Change the mode to offline 2 Select Action on error from the system register table of the project
181. input condition 2 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool If the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer If the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again Check 1 Check for the duplicated use of output Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high level instruction 2 Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used 10 5 10 2 5 A Protect Error Message Appears When a password function is used Procedure Enter a password in the Set PLC Password menu in the programming tool and turn on the Access radio button 1 Select Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar 2 The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed Turn on the radio button next to Access enter a password and click on the Settings button Set PLC password dialog box Set PLC Password Untitle1 lt Current status 8 digits Protect Close Available retry counts 3 counts ee pe digit number E Help C 4digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode C Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Je Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be upl
182. ion 1 N Communication The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the unit number and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the computer As for the FP X0 L40MR and L60MR connect to the COM port terminals R8485 Note It is recommended to use a commercial RS232C RS485 converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd Computer or PLC equipped with FP X0 FP X0 FP X0 MEWTOCOL master function Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Commercial converter RS485 Sa The unit number for the PLC to which the command is being sent is included in the command message The unit number of the PLC sending a response is included in the response message Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings For using 1 N communication that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line unit numbers must be specified so that the destination of the command can be identified Unit numbers are specified by the system register Setting system registers No Name Set Value No 410 No 412 Computer link Communication format Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist STX exist 19200 115200 bps Note1 The settings of the baud rate sw
183. ion of operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type gt Enter the correct combination of operands Program may be damaged gt Try to send the program again When inputting with the programming tool software a deletion addition or change of order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 14 4 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera tion Description and steps to take status A Probably a hardware eae 20 OPU error Stops Pcsse conan your dealer PELLET lalala E21 RAM error E22 RAM error2 a E23 RAM errora Stops tah en seroma einer RAM nlala E24 RAM error4 y E25 RAM error5 The models of master memories are different A Use the master memories created with the 1 same model FP e FPO FPOR FP2 and FP1 C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer FP X When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memory cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off please User s ROM contact your dealer AlAlAlAlLAlAlAIAIA FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to ope
184. is the non isolated type The large potential difference leads to the damage to the devices 6 6 6 4 Computer Link 6 4 1 Overview Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer y FPWIN GR etc Command message PLC P _ Response message There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the side that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave MEWTOCOL master function For L40MR and L60MR types only This function is to carry out the communication on the master side side that issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or F146 RECV It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function Examp
185. it Necessary for the backup of Backup battery operation memory real time AFP8801 clock data Note FPO mounting plate Used for expansion FPO a adapter and FPO Expansion AFP0803 slim type unit 10 pcs pack FP X expansion cable Note The total length of the exapansion cable should be within 160 cm 1 3 1 2 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 2 1 Restrictions on FP X Expansion Unit For L40 L60 only Restrictions on type of FP X0 control units Up to three FP X expansion units can be connected to FP X0 L40 or L60 control unit The maximum number of points when installing expansion units is as below Controllable I O points Number of I O points when using 3 units of E30 expansion I O unit Number of I O points when T f control uni i ype of control unit using control unit FP X0 L40R Control unit 40 points Max 130 points FP X0 L60R Control unit 60 points Max 150 points ipsciencacacocenene nee mle alalalate 2 T aill DIAMLQQMQQAAC IA all DILMQMGAC amp Qc Pe QOOOOOOOAE al poces Ii Control unit FP X Expansion unit FP A Expansion unit eee Up to 3 units can be connected Restrictions on type of FP X expansion units Up to three FP X expansion units can be connected to FP X0 L40 or L60 control unit however the installable positions and the number of units differ depending on the type of expansion units as below Type of expansion unit Installable position FP X E30 Expansion Unit
186. itches on teh side of the unit and the systerm register No 415 should be the same 6 14 6 4 6 MEWTOCOL Master For L40MR and L60MR types Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function The MEWTOCOL master is not available for the tool port It is available for the COM port RS485 port only Sample program Sets the communication port to COM1 the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing 0 words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 ia MV H2 DT100 7 FO MV H1001 DT O 7 Fo MV HO WRO J F14DMV HO _DT50 J F4DMV HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 1 R2 is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO RI RO R2 lee Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 H F61 DCMP_ DT50 _pT60 R1 R900B age D a 1 1 F36 D 1 DT50 Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and SSF DT1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port R1 H F145 SEND DT 100 _DT50 DTO ko 7 Fo MV H1 WRO 1 70 Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number
187. k for using the MEWTOCOL master 6 12 6 4 4 MEWTOCOL Slave Function 1 1 Communication Overview For a 1 1 computer link between the FPOR and a computer and RS232C cable is needed Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC Computer L Command message Response message Note A commercial R8485 conversion adapter is required for connecting to the COM port of FP X0 L40MR or L60MR System register settings A aa No 410 No 412 Computer link Communication format bit 7 bits 8 bits None Odd Even 1 bit 2 bit CR CR LF None ETX STX not exist STX exist Note The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed Programming of computer link For a computer link a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side No communication program is required on the PLC side Specify the communication format only by the system register The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Example of connection to the computer lt 1 1 communication gt Tool port Computer side PLC side D SUB 9 pin Mini DIN a pin Symbol Pin no 6 13 6 4 5 MEWTOCOL Slave Funct
188. l specifying the initial soeed target soeed acceleration time deceleration time and target value Linear Performs the linear interpolation control by specifying the interpolation composite speed acceleration time deceleration time X axis target value and Y axis target value Setting the system register For using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 7 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise counter clockwise output method m Forward Reverse gt Control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a reverse vaT LF LELE LI Lomm rotation pulse Y2 aoe E E E G E Y3 Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON Forward Reverse gt Control is carried out using one pulse i output to specify the speed and another Puise Putse Y9 Pee et ea to specify the direction of rotation with l on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction sign signal is OFF OFF ON Incremental countin Decremental countin Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse OFF Forward A Reverse Control is carried out using one pulse l output to specify the speed and another eT PL L AT LFU LT to specify the direction of rotation with Y2 m on off signals In this mode forward Y ii
189. l val yc nc ET 999929 PTL ogee es mn Sa Not used Output terminal Not used Input terminal Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit Output terminal Each COM terminal CO C1 of Ry type is separate Each power supply terminal of Tr type is separate Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines 3 9 3 2 FP X Expansion FPO Adapter 3 2 1 Parts Names Functions and Specifications FP X expansion FPO adapter AFPX EFPO Toone f 4 ZUUDUU L UUUUs bet bet bet bed FP b b b pod pod q O power krd W Hie Se t DO PPPOA A A A HRHHHHHHHHHHHHH AFPX EFPO DIN standard rail attachment F p ee ee ee ee eee ee A LED and operation status When the power of 24 V DC is supplied and the communication starts with the control unit the LED lights When the communication cannot be carried out it goes out When the communication starts with the control unit the LED lights When the communication cannot be carried out it goes out When the FPO expansion unit is not connected it flashes ERROR Red When an error occurs on the connection with the FPO expansion unit it flashes FP X expansion bus connector Connects the FP X control unit or FP X expansion unit The provided expansion cable AFPX EC08 is used for the connection It is not necessary to specify the TERM terminal setting for the e
190. le PLC temperature control unit eco power meter image processor MEWTOCOL slave function This function is to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the system registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Note lt is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function 6 4 2 MEWTOCOL Slave Function Outline of operation Command and response Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses When the PLC receives a command it processes the command regardless of the sequence program and sends a response back to the computer On the computer side the execution result of the command can be confirmed by the transmitted response MEWTOCOL COM sketch Communication is performed based on the communication procedure of MEWTOCOL COM Data is sent received in ASCII format The computer has the first right of transmission The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a mes
191. leading edge detection The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other cases the instruction is not executed Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection When RUN begins for example when the system is powered on the off gt on change of the execution condition trigger is not detected Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next page When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 below which change the order of execution of instructions the operation of the instruction may change depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions such as 1 MC and MCE instructions 2 JP and LBL instructions 3 LOOP and LBL instructions 4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions 11 4 11 2 2 Operation and Precautions When RUN starts Operation of first scan after RUN begins The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode if the trigger execution condition is already on RUN Power on Trigger Operation of instruction Not executed Executed
192. line edit mode Complete the program conversion in the tool software and then change to the online edit mode to check 2 When boolean mode A ladder editing is cleared Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again After the operation change to the online edit mode to check When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN The default setting is 5 seconds f oee Setting F Select Transfer from File in the menu bar The Transfer data screen will Network type aa u open COM port Cancel 7 Select Condition to open petal 115200 bps Initialize Communication Setting screen Change the value for Timeout It will be set as the Click OK button to complete the following value automatically change of setting Data Length 5 Stop Bit 1 g g f Odd C Even Ti Time out 5 Sec Parameter for automatic setting W Baud rate F Iw Parity Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN 1 When the result of rewriting is a syntax error lt Example gt When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions 1 Step ladder instructions SSTP STPE 2 Subroutine instructions SUB RET 3 Interrupt instructions INT IRET 4 JP LBL 5 LOOP LBL 6 MC MCE Also rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax error 2 During
193. link 1 R9090 to R9O9F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 The operation modes RUN PROG can be checked for any given PLC we eps ole u ole el7 s s lelels Conditions ON When the unit is in the RUN mode for on off ON When the unit is in the PROG mode PLC link transmission error relay R9050 This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission Punto e s ue e e ee Ee e e Eeee ON When a tramission error has occurred in the PC PLC link Conditions or when there is an error in the setting for the PC PLC link area for on off OFF When there is no transmission error 3 Key Point Monitoring the PC PLC link status Using a programming tool the PC PLC link status items such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred can be monitored Using FPWIN GR Select Status Display under Online in the menu Click the PC link button after the Status Display screen is shown Using FPWIN Pro Select PLC Link Status under Online in the menu sani Note Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible from the programming tool 6 41 6 6 7 PC PLC Link Response Time The maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula Tmax Tsi Ts2 gt Tsn Tit Tso Tlik Lecam Aa 4 TIK link addition processing time DTS transmission time per station aT 3 150 master station scan time 2 T
194. lock a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If deleted the output memory area will be held Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode Write in the order RET SUB CALL Delete in the order CALL SUB RET Write in the order IRET INT Delete in the order INT IRET 11 11 FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Operation of each Instruction 11 12 JP LOOP LBL A distance with the same number cannot be defined twice An SSTP instruction cannot be written in a subprogram Be sure to write the instruction for setting the loop number before LBL LOOP instructions Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not possible for a program with no step ladder area Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode In the case of an SSTP instruction only writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a program with a step ladder area Write in the order JP LBL or LOOP LBL Delete in the order LBL JP or LBL LOOP 11 5 Processing During Forced Input and Output 11 5 1 Processing When Forced Input Output is Initiated During RUN 1 Processing of external input
195. lse output Home return Pulse output Linear interpolation S n S n S n e 2 Pa 14 53 High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FP2 FP X V 5 High speed M counter and Pulse output controls Change and read DMV of the elapsed value of high speed counter and Pulse output F171 Pulse output Trapezoidal control and home return F172 Pulse output JOG operation F173 PWM output F174 Pulse output Selectable data table control operation F175 Pulse output Linear interpolation F176 Pulse output Circular interpolation S DT90052 FPx S DT90044 FP X S DT90300 FP x DT90044 D FP X DT90300 D Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified o
196. m communication 8 Input time constant settings System registers 430 to 437 Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering or noises Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Option gt PLC Configuration 3 When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However the system registers after No 400 become effective when the mode is changed from PROG mode to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized 14 3 14 1 2 Table of System Registers for FP X0 L14 L30 L40 L60 ress value Hold type area starting number setting
197. mage memory of input Xn CXn Timer processing Setting Xn value System register S setting value Timer processing Setting value System register setting value Note The input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal I O update If the partial update instruction is executed for the input in the time constant processing the time constant processing will be invalid and the input status at the time will be read out and set The time constant processing can be performed for the input other than XO to XF add on cassettes or expansion units by the F182 FILTR instruction The timer instruction is not used for the timer processing in this equivalent circuit The time constant processing is invalid when the high speed counter pulse catch or interrupt has been specified Input time constant setting function and applicable models register No I O No ao XOtoxs J A Aa Aa A ai o Xox S NA aAa A A 432 X8toXB Na Aa A A gt gt gt 433 XCtoxF va a A A 434 Xt0toxt3 wa Na A A 435 Xt4toxt7 NA NA A A 436 Xt8toxX1B NA NA NA A 437 XC toxtF wa na Na A A Available N A Not available P P S LS D gt 9 7 9 4 P13 PICWT Instruction Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built in ROM F ROM data area control unit using the P13 PICWT instruction Note the followings for the use
198. move BKMV S1 S2 The data between S1 and S2 is lololololololo PBKMV D transferred to the area starting at D ai aain koati Ga D ibaa a F12 Data read from ICRD S1 S2 The data stored in the expansion memory EEP ROM D of the EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 11 O x x x x x x are transferred to the area starting at D x x Data writeto PICWT S1 S2 The data specified by S1 and S2 are a EEP ROM D transferred to the EEP ROM starting D j at Data read from ICRD S1 S2 The data stored in the expansion memory F ROM D of the F ROM specified by S1 and S2 1 are transferred to the area starting at D D p D KX s s D Block copy COPY S D1 The data of S is transferred to the all area lololololo 2 PCOPY D2 between D1 and D2 ea Ne lee ee i g S1 i P13 Data writeto PICWT S1 S2 The data specified by S1 and S2 are PROM o OWT B S ranstenedtothe E ROM stating at F12 Data read from ICRD S1 S2 The data stored in the expansion memory are transferred to the area starting at D Data write to ICWT S1 S2 The data specified by S1 and S2 are IC card PICWT D rartered to the IC card expansion x memory area starting at D x Program read PGRD S The program specified using S is from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory 3 X x xX x x x O memory card
199. n an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly
200. n setting is specified programs will be disalbed to be read out If the setting is cancelled forcibly all programs and system registers will be deleted Therefore note that programs and system registers should be managed on your own responsibility Backup battery Do not install the battery when it is not used There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged vi Programming Tool Restrictions Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units Type of unit Type of programming tool AFPXO Used FPWIN GR Ver 2 Windows software Ver 2 91 or later FPWIN GR Ver 1 Not used Windows software Used Conforms to Ecetia To vere Ver 6 3 or later AFP1113V2 AFP1113 AFP1111A AFP1112A AFP1111 AFP1112 FP memory loader AT Oa cis y AFP8671 Ver 2 0 or later Note Precautions concerning version upgrade In case of using FPWIN GR Ver 1 please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver 2 FPWIN GR Ver 2 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site FPWIN Pro Ver 6 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site The handy programming unit cannot be used Do not download any programs for other units such as FP1 to the FP X0 using the handy programming unit Handy programming unit Not used Our website address http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list patch plc jsp vii vill Chapter 1 Unit Types and Restrictions 1 1 Unit Types 1 1 1 FP X0 Control Units A Avail
201. n status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time of power up Check the contents of special data register FPO DT 9010 FP FP X DT90010 DT90011 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement gt Check the contents of special data register FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 Selection of operation status using system register23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function AI AJAJAJAJAJAJA A Available Slave station connecting time error for MEWNET F system Description and steps to take Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time Selection of operation status using system register24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The time required for slave station connection exceeds the setting of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system register25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Operation became impossible
202. nd being processed 14 75 14 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Reads the on and off status of contact Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units bac oom seas O re bs core range Write data area WD Writes data to a data area TS Monitors a registered contact or data using the M M i E h f ifi ina 16 Preset contact area fill command SC AS aa O epee tee ene ae point on and off pattern i Wri h h f Preset data area fill command SD rites the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register AR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the Remote control programmable controller Doon S Aborts communication Read contact area Write contact area 14 76 14 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD BCD data COIN OP WON O 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000
203. nd when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the communication port Data Data register DT Data transmission using writing a F159 MTRN External device Data table for transmission send buffer DT100 K8 When transmission begins K8 When transmission ends KO DT101 H42 B H41 A Reduces one by one at every transmission DT102 H44 D H43 C Data is transmitted in order from DT103 H46 F H45 E the low order byte Binary data can be transmitted DT104 H48 H H47 G Data table before transmission Sample program for sending data The following program transmits the characters ABCDEFGH Hex to an external device using the communication port RO R10 o J R10 F95 ASC M ABCDEFGH DT101 The internal relay R10 is turned on when the transmission condition RO tums on Data conversion The characters ABCDEFGH are converted to an ASCII code and written to DT101 to DT104 pm Data transmission The data in the send buffer is sent fromthe 1 COM1 port F159 MTRN DT 100 KE Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes are sent from communication port K1 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 ABCDEFGH is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register 2 The data is sent from the communication port using the F159 MTRN instruction Explanatory
204. ne instructions Subroutine When the trigger is on Executes the call CALL n subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine The output in the subroutine is maintained Output off When the trigger is on Executes the type FOAL n subroutine subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the call subroutine But the output in the subroutine is cleared aoe pe ___ Indicates the start of the subroutine entr program n e ho return i a a a a memet NT picor fips esatoteitometneaan o 0 ololololo etun a e a eeke return Select interrupt enable disable or clear in solo O ofofolo control S1 and S2 and execute SW ee ae O Available X Not available Not available partially 1 Available for FP e only 2 In the FR2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine program has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 14 38 4 Special setting instructions Communica tion condi tions setting Password setting PLC link time setting MEWTOCOL COM response control High speed counter operation mode System registers No H Hor srsim H H svs2 5 DI oH Change the communication conditions for the COM port or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the password specified by the PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the inte
205. nl ol 2 a a Q e Q Q Q Q Q Q OO Q Q O O LJ OO Q kk pt N com x1 x3 xs x7 X9 XB XD XF a a nc com com xi xia x18 x7 x19 x18 x10 XiF _ com xo x2 x4 x6 x8 xa xc XE Com com x10 x12 x14 X16 X18 X1A X1C X1E e 24 Yo v2 4 ys v7 J ve va _ ve yo ve J Y10 Y12 _Y14 Y15 Y17 Y18 Y1A l fo Y1 Ys col yeli ci yo YB UNC c2 YE c3 Y11 13 C4 Y16 BAS Oo Bb Ob 6 UR 33 C5 Y19 Y1B LL COM port Transistor output Relay output terminals 1 Not used Relay output terminals 2 terminals terminals 1 RS485 Service power supply terminals for input output Note Do not connect the service power supply terminals for input and other DC power supply in parallel 2 14 Chapter 3 Specifications of Expansion Units and Expansion FPO Adapter 3 1 FP X Expansion Units 3 1 1 Parts Names and Functions FP X E16 exapansion I O unit u i LAJ x Ce P BA BA EANA TY VY VY EY w gt E E H COCA JGGG Y NY NY VY KOQOQOCYQCICY JIII CICI j m m D o 5 z2 t i C i amp lt LOY CY CY CY CY SY o ow ae oe 1 A N L Y v oH 0l 3 _ SF O LLL3 oH JA oH mkn B t DIN rail D attachment ee i AQOAE Hl KAA CQ 6 DIPS PSS HL SAS A S Wi NZ NA VE
206. nly when installing a backup battery Note2 Without the battery use at the default settings If changing the settings the Hold Non hold operation becomes unstable 14 4 Description ress value For FP X0 L40 L60 eer 3 link relays used for rags i link data registers used for a Staring ae for link relay fo 0 to 63 transmission 43 Link relay transmission size O O to 64 words oa Starting number for link data register on MET transmission 45 Link data register transmission size 0 Oto 127 words a PC PLC link switch flag Maximum unit number setting for 16 tone MEWNET WO PC PLC link oe A link relays used for ngs link data registers used for 82 o Number for link relay Ce re transmission 53 Link relay transmission size O 0 to 64 words EN Starting number for link data register 128 to 255 transmission 55 Link data register transmission size 0 Oto 127 words Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET W0 PC PLC link 1 to 16 D D oO T x O ar Q A PC PLC link WO 1 setting 14 5 ress High speed counter operation mode setting X0 X1 X4 X5 g _ Cc D 5 fe S a E Q O lt 2 D T L O O High speed counter operation mode setting X2 X3 X6 X7 CHO Do not set input X0 as high speed counter CH1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter CH2 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter
207. nput by system registers Note5 The near home input is used by assigning an arbitrary contact and operating the bit 4 of the special data register DT90052 with the instruction FO Note6 These values are available only when the conditions of each item such as output method or No of channels are executed This is the value when the pulse input output process is not simultaneously performed or interrupt program is not executed PWM output function Output No Pulse output R9120 L14 L30 6 to 1 6 kHz 0 0 to 100 0 R9121 L40 L60 6 to 3 0 kHz Resolution 1001 Note1 The L14 type can only use CHO 1 4 7 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions The maximum counting speed and pulse output frequency of the high speed counter vary according to the number of channels to be used or the combination of used functions Use the chart below as a guide Simplified chart Maximum counting speed of High speed counter For L14 and L30 types Available A Combination of high speed counter 7 Max counting speed Frequency kHz ombination with pulse output function trapezoidal control Single phase Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the target value match ON OFF instruction F166 F 167 or an interrupt program is executed simultaneously Simplified chart Maximum counting speed of High speed counter For L40 and L60 types ANE Max counting speed Frequency kHz f high EEE
208. ns on when general purpose serial communication mode is selected RA note When the power is turned on the operating mode selected in system register 412 takes effect It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode 6 27 6 5 7 Setting Communication Parameters Tool port RS232C COM port RS485 The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click Tool Port or COM Port from the left list Dialog box of PLC system register setting COM port selection screen PLC Configuration Untitle1 Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 1 No 413 Communication Format enan on Eno No 410 Unit No Time No 412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits X Link wo Computer Link td Parity Odd Controller input settings HSC Modem Enabled l Stop Bit 11 Controller output settings PLS PW M Interrupt 7 pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input No415 Baudrate 9600 bps Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input L60R Onl COM Port CR Cancel Read PLC Initialize Help No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode Click General communication
209. nter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according Pulse output to the control code specified by 5 controls S The control code is stored in DT9052 DMV Change and S Transfers S 1 S to high speed read of the DT9044 counter and Pulse output elapsed elapsed value of value area high speed Transfers value in high speed counter and D counter and Pulse output elapsed Pulse output value area to D 1 D Target value HC1S n S Yn Turns output Yn on when the much on elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Available Not available Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e This instruction is available for FP Ver 2 0 or later This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later Available for FP X0 L40 and L60 types only The instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later and the pulse execution type can be specified FP10SH cannot be used 4 D 6 xo Se S S N r 14 51 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH ae A Boo lean Operand Description pan Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target Target value much HC1R n S Yn off value of S 1 S Positioning control S n Outputs a positioning pulse from Trapezoidal the specified output YO or Y1 control home according to the content
210. number of switches in series If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor ohotoelectric sensor or proximity sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below The formula is based on an input impedance of 5 6kQ The input impedance varies depending on the input terminal number Precaution when using LED equipped limit switch LED equipped i limit switch resistor Power supply for input r Internal resistor of limit switch KO R Bleeder resistor kQ The off voltage of input is 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select the bleeder resistor R so that 24 2 4 The current will be greater than The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is 13 44 3 KK 5 6x 2 4 The wattage W of the resistor is 2 P pply voltage W ower i woe x 3 to 5 times 5 4 2 Output Wiring If the input of PLC does not turn off because of the leakage current from the LED equipped limit switch the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Do not connect a load that exceeds the maximum swiching ability to the output terminal Protective circuit for inductive loads e With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load e When switching DC inductive loads with relay output type be sure to connect a diod across the ends of the load When using an AC inducti
211. number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below For baud rate 115 2 kbps 99 E yror baud rate 19 2 kbps Number of units stations 7 0 700 1200 Transmission distance m Note3 The settings of the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No 415 should be the same Only 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note5 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Factory default settings Port type Datalength Parity Stopbit 9600 bits 8bits Od tit COM port 115200 bis sbits Odd tbt Ea Note As it is the non isolated type the potential difference between the power supplies of RS485 devices should be 4 V or less If it exceeds 4 V the unit may not communicate The large potential difference leads to the damage to devices 12 7 12 1 4 VO Allocation of FP X0 Control Unit The I O allocation of the FP X0 control unit is fixed I O numbers Type of control unit Number of allocation I O number Input 8 points XO to X7 FP X0 C14R control unit Output 6 points 0 to Y5 Input 16 points XO to XF FP X0 L30R control unit Output 14 points voo YD FP X0 L40R control unit Input 24 points T 7 FP X0 L40MR control unit Output 16 points YO to YF Input 32 points oelah FP X0 L6OR cont
212. o Data is received by transferring the data from the communication port to the data register specified in the system register as the receive buffer and then being stored there automatically sending and receiving data with the external devices is carried out via the data register Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general purpose serial communication function the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used The F159 MTRN instruction and the reception done flag are used in these operations to transfer data between the PLC and an external device Sending data Receiving data Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored in Data received from the communication port is the data register used as the send buffer DT stored in the receive buffer specified in the system When F159 MTRN is executed the data is output register and the reception done flag goes on from the communication port Data can be received whenever the reception done flag is off Data Data register DT Data transmission using Data register DT writing a F159 MTRN Transmitted data Received data Device with RS232C port Reception done flag on The terminator specified in the system register is When data is being received the reception automatically added to the data that has been done flag is controlled by the F159 MTRN sent instruction No termina
213. o d eoa e a a a a A a 5 5 5 3 OWE SUDD ecsuiusiieiesteoidinstsaheed eedcinatecnahieiest conee neues heeedeesteaddaas 5 6 5 4 Wiring of Input ANd Output cece ee ccc eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeessaeeesees 5 8 SO Winnog of Terminal BICK 2a rnivinciiaterincqndhcnaghsaen a 5 11 5 6 Setting and Wiring of COM Port R8485 aannannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnna 5 12 5 7 Handling of Backup Battery For L40 and L60 types eee 5 13 5 8 5alety MEASURES ssena aE aE E TE i 5 16 Communication FUNCTIONS wisiccsiuciistscuncascstusceevareeriere anette nncmnaenwes 6 1 Oe RUNCHONS ANA TVPG Seisin na iets canstadand utnaunoutaiendieluetabnatentacen 6 2 6 2 COMMUNICALON Port TYPE esanei an aa E aT 6 4 6 3 Commu nication Specifications sasssa ner 6 5 6 4 COMPUTER LINK asaan E Ea EN 6 7 6 5 General purpose Serial COMMUNICATION ccccceeeceeeeeeceeeeseeeesaeeeees 6 17 6 6 PC PLC link Function For L4OMR and L60MR types c ceeeeee 6 31 6 7 MODBUS RTU Communication For L4OMR and L60MR types 6 46 10 11 12 13 14 High speed Counter Pulse Output and PWM Output Functions 7 1 7 1 OVEIVIEW of Each FUNCIONS siacsicccssancionsusdi bes aetientaetcadesdadnsdaneldendadiwedsdoweree 7 2 7 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items cccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 7 4 7 3 High speed Counter FUNCTION ccccccccceeceeeeeeeceeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseueess
214. oaded 10 2 6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN Condition A syntax error or a self diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred Procedure 1 Check if the ERR LED is flashing Refer to 10 2 2 If ERR LED is ON Procedure 2 Execute a total check function using the tool software to determine the location of the syntax error When using FPWIN GR select Debug on the menu bar and select Totally check program Click on the Execute button in the total check dialog box 10 2 7 Expansion Unit does not Operate Procedure 1 Check if the terminal setting is specified for the expansion unit Check if the terminal setting is specified for multiple expansion units Procedure 2 Check if the expansion FPO adapter is installed at the last position When the expansion FPO adapter is installed at the last position the terminal setting for other expansion units is not necessary Procedure 3 Check if the power supply has turned on and off in a short time such as momentary power failure There is a possibility that the expansion unit has not been recognized due to the occurrence of momentary power failure Turn off and on the power supply again 10 6 10 3 Operation Errors 10 3 1 Outline of Operation Errors An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high level instruction is executed When an operation error occurs the ERROR ALARM LED on the control unit will bl
215. ode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns
216. odes MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM 14 64 14 4 1 Table of Syntax Check Error Opera Error ie tion Description and steps to take code status A program with a syntax error has been Syntax St written error CPP Wes Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number Duplicated Change to PROG mode and correct the output error Stops program so that one relay l l is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 A timer counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is Not paired S either missing or in an incorrect position error tops Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written in a specific area main program area or E5 Program subprogram area has been written to a different area for example a subroutine SUB Note Jarea error StOPS l
217. oints per common 1 point common 3 points common 4 points common Seine Lifetime Electri 100 thousand times or more Frequency of switching at the rated ectrical oo l control capacity 20 times min Surge absorber None Operating mode indicator LED displa Note Resistance load Circuit diagram Eg rz 5 3 2 Transistor type NPN a eO Insulation method Open collector 5 to 24 V DC 4 75 to 26 4 V DC 0 5 A 1 5 A 6 points Common 0 3 V DC or less Response time eed 1 ms or less External power supply YOtov7 fF Y8toYD _ _ ___ and terminals Current E16 45mAorless Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Circuit diagram i Output indicator LED i AA l i I Outupt terminal External power Power supply supply of 24V DC 5 to 24V DC terminal Output circuit Internal circuit 3 5 Transistor type PNP MG CTO Insulation method Open collector 24 V DC 21 6 to 26 4 V DC 0 5 A 1 5 A 6 points Common 0 5 V DC or less Response time A 1 ms or less External power supply YOtov7 fF Y8toYD _ ____ and terminals Current E16 65mAorless Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Circuit diagram Output indicator LED AA External power supply Load power supply 24V DC terminal Internal circuit Output ci
218. olo compare S3 gt R900B on gt S1 1 S 1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on Block data BCMP S1 S2 S3 Compares the two blocks beginning with olo ie compare PBCMP S2 and S3 to see if they are equal Logic operation instructions AND PWAN a OR pod 16 bit data XOR 1 S2 D 16 bit data XNR S1 S2 D exclusive PXNR NOR 16 bit data WUNI zi S2 S3 S1 AND S3 OR S2 AND 3 gt D unite eeu When S3 is HO S2 gt D When S3 is HFFFF S1 D Data conversion instructions F70 Block check BCC al S2 S3 Creates the code for checking the data P70 code PBCC specified by S2 and S3 and stores it in calculation D The calculation method is specified by S1 F71 Hexadecimal HEXA S1 S2 D Converts the hexadecimal data specified by P71 data gt ASCII PHEXA S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in code D Example HABCD gt H 42 41 44 43 F72 ASCII code AHEX 1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 P72 Hexadeci mal PAHEX and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it data in D Example H 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DCBA F73 4 digit BCD BCDA S1 S2 D Converts the four digits of BCD data P73 data gt ASCII PBCDA specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code code and stores it in D Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 21 4 3 F74 ASCII code gt ABCD 1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 P74 4 digit BCD PABCD and
219. on stations that have been added refers to stations which are connected between station no 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on Comparing examples 2 and 3 the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not been added to the link As a result the PC PLC link response time is longer The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are one or more stations that have not been added to the link 6 43 Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added lf there are stations that have not been added to the link the Tlk time link addition processing time and with this the transmission cycle time will be longer T max Ts1 Ts2 Tsn TIit Tso TIlk TIK Tic link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tis link error stop command sending time Tso master station scan time With the SYS1 instruction the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced Thus SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time lt Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1TO 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC PLC link from the default value of 400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1TO Permissible range for key word no 2 10 to 400 10 m
220. on the Action on Error tab The screen shown below is displayed PLC Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold l No 20 Disable settings for duplicated output Time Controller input esttines HSC l No 23 Stop when an 1 0 verification error occurs Controller output settings PLSP M Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings l No 26 Stop when an operation error occurs Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Tool Port COM Port Cancel Initialize Help Example1 When allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for No 20 When operation is resumed it will not be handled as an error Example2 When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred Turn off the check box for No 26 When operation is resumed it will be continued but will be handled as an error 10 2 10 2 Troubleshooting 10 2 1 If ERROR LED is Flashing Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Check the error contents error code using the programming tool With the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is changed to the PROG mode the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically Check the contents of the self diagnosed error Status display dialog box Status Display Untitlel Program Information Program Size 16000 OK 1 Machine Lanquage Of OK File Register Size Of
221. on the slave station an abnormality such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FR2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit Turn on the power supply for the expansion unit at the same time or before the control unit is turned on The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of control unit is not installed Check the installation of the backup battery and then replace battery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic error MEWNET F terminal station error MEWNET F I O update synchro nous error Multi CPU I O regis tration error CPU2 only IC memory card back up battery error IC memory card back up battery error Incompati ble IC memory card error No unit for the configu diagnostic error set by F148 ERR P148 PERR Instruction Opera tion status Description and steps to take Terminal station setting was not properly performed Check stations at both ends of the communication path and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST selecto1inmjvbg
222. on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode WR909 FP X0 Address Description Turns on when Unit No 1 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 is in the RUN mode No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R909B Turns on when Unit No 12 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode R9090 R9091 R9092 R9093 R9094 R9095 R9096 MEWNET WO PC PLC link 1 operation mode relay R9097 R9098
223. or Setting disable Header Setting disable No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Specify the value to match the connected external device The settings of the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No 415 should be the same 6 49 6 7 3 MODBUS Master Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MODBUS master function Sample program Sets the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing words to 2 in the DT100 and DT 101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first a Clear the write data DT50 and DT451 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 fg FO MV H2 DT100 J FO MV _ H1001 DT101 J Fo MV _ HO _wrRo 4 FiDMV HO o DT50 J F1DMV HFFFFFFFF DT60 J R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31F R2is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 RO R2 lee law Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched 39 R1 F61 DCMP DT50 DT60o R1 R900B J aaa 7 1 gt F36D 1 DT50 J Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port 49 55 R1 H F145 SEND DT 100 DT50 DTO Ko J FO
224. or occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error 14 63 Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnormal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT 90000 In the case of operation error the error address will be stored in the DT90017 and DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At the STATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consult the table of self diagnostic error c
225. other pulse output instructions can be executed as long as this flag is ON The pulse output instruction flags are allocated to each channel Pulse output instruction flag CHO R9120 CH1 R9121 Operation of pulse output instruction flag The pulse output instruction flags vary even during scanning Replace them with internal relays at the beginning of the program when using them several times in the program 7 4 13 Common Precautions for Pulse Output Instructions Note that there are the following restrictions on using each function of the pulse output Precautions when using instructions in PULSE SIGN mode Common to F171 F172 F175 F177 When each instruction is executed pulses are output approx 300us after the direction signal has been output the motor drive characteristics are simultaneously taken into consideration Stop by pulse output control instruction FO Common to F171 F172 F174 F175 F177 Performing a forced stop may cause the output count value in the elapsed value area to differ from the input count value at the motor side Therefore you must execute a home return after pulse output has stopped When executing the emergency stop pulse output stop with the pulse output control instruction FO the operations being executed with various instructions will be cancelled and the pulse output will be immediately stopped When the emergency stop request flag bit 3 of DT90052 is on instructions cannot be
226. ould generate high switching surges Min 100mm or less Static electricity Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit Use a power supply wire that is thicker than 2 mm2 AWG14 and twist it The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line However it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using a isolating transformer before supplying the power Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line input output device and operating device If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse Be sure to supply power to a control and an expansion units from a single power supply Turning on off of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously Power supply sequence In order to protect the power supply sequence make sure to turn off the control unit before the input output power supply If the input output power supply is turned off before the control unit or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily the controller detects change of input level and might conduct an unexpected operation Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below
227. peration running R100 F175 instruction execution R101 i Positioning operation complete R102 Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Data table Data Example of sample register Setting item Unit Settable range program H1000 0000 Set according to the control code Control code Increment on the next page CW CCW ii Composite speed Initial K500 K6 to K50000 speed HZ Composite speed Target K5000 K6 to K50000 speed Hz axi DT110 X axis target value pulses K5000 K 8 388 608 to K 8 388 607 DT112 Y axis target value pulses K2000 K 8 388 608 to K 8 388 607 DT114 X axis component speed The result is stored as 2 words in real t Initial speed Hz DT116 X axis component speed Target speed Hz V X axis movement amount Y axis movement amount X axis compo composite speed x X axis movement amount nentspeed Y axis component speed Y axis compo composite speed x Y axis movement amount Initial soeed Hz anani ira ln tec cea e A al eck a Y axis Component speed Target speed Hz DT118 7 J X axis movement amount Y axis movement amount DT120 O 7 31 Sample program R50 R9120 R9121 R504 R500 DF R500 R500 R501 DF R501 DF F1 DMV H10000000 DT500 F1 DMV K500 _ DT502 F1 DMV K5000 DT 504 F1 DMV K100 _ DT506 F1 DMV K1000 DT508 F1 DMV K5000 DT510 F1 DMV K2000 DT512
228. points W R58 to W R62 rep i when Powers GUL oa register 300 words DT2200 to Veo off DT2499 Data register 5 words DT7890 to DT8191 Note1 The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer Note3 This is the specification when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC at 25 C The frequency will decrease depending on voltage temperature or usage condition Note4 For information on the restrictions on combinations refer to 7 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items Note5 Writing is available up to 10000 times Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers Note6 Refresh time of FPO expansion unit 8 point unit No of units used x 0 8 ms 16 point unit No of units used x 1 0 ms 32 point unit No of units used x 1 3 ms 64 point unit No of units used x 1 9 ms 12 5 12 1 3 Communication Specifications Tool port p i yoe Specifications Baud rate to be set by system register 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Note3 Trans mission General purpose ARR P ASCII Binary code serial communication Communication format to be set by system register Note1 CR CR LF None ETX NOIeE 2 units Computer link slave Communication functions Modem initialization General purpose communication only in RUN mode Note1
229. put 8 points X300 to X307 FP X E16T 16P expansion I O unit Output 8 points V300 to Y307 Input 16 points X300 to X30F Crea enere oie a Output 14 points Y300 to Y30D I O numbers when installed as the second expansion unit Type of expansion unit Number of allocation I O number FP X E16X expansion input unit Input 16 points X400 to X40F Input 8 points X400 to X407 FP X E161T 16P expansion I O unit Output 8 points Y400 to Y407 Input 16 points X400 to X40F ie ei a he Output 14 points Y400 to Y40D I O numbers when installed as the third expansion unit Type of expansion unit Number of allocation I O number FP X E16X expansion input unit Input 16 points X500 to X50F FP X E16T 16P expansion VO unit weut points oe Output 8 points Y500 to Y507 Input 16 points X500 to X50F fr a a Output 14 points Y500 to Y50D 4 3 4 4 Allocation of FP0 FPOR Expansion Unit 4 4 1 VO Allocation The FPO FPOR expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FPO expansion adapter The I O numbers are allocated from the unit nearest to the expansion FPO adapter in ascending order alll Expansion FPO adapter FPO FPOR expansion unit Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3 4 4 2 Number of Expansion Units and I O Allocation Only one expansion FPO adapter can be connected at the last position of the FP X expansion bus The I O allocation varies depending on the installation
230. r Slave Slave Slave R5485 V V Vv Device Device Device compatible with Modbus compatible compatible with Modbus with Modbus RTU slave function RTU slave RTU slave function function Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit Master Device compatible Slave Slave Slave with Modbus RTU slave RS485 function FP X0 FP XO 6 46 MODBUS RTU command message frame START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END _ _ 3 5 character time 16 bits 3 5 character time ADDRESS Unit No 8 bits O to 99 decimal Note1 0 Broadcast address Note2 Slave unit No is 1 to 99 decimal Note3 For MODBUS 0 to 247 decimal FUNCTION 8 bits DATA Varies depending on commands CRC 16 bits END 3 5 character time Differs depending on baud rate Refer to reception judgement time Response in normal status The same message as a command is returned for single write command A part of a command message 6 bytes from the beginning is returned for multiple write command Response in abnormal status In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command except transmission error Slave address unit number Function code 80H One of either 1 2 or 3 Error code CRC Error code
231. r arga the target CH is stored in each Notus SSS NANA Notus SSSA Notus Oo S o NAN Notus SSSA Notus ooo S o O Oa Notus ooo S o O Oa When pulse output control is onena monio executed by FO MV DT90052 N A instruction the setting value for oe the target CH is stored in each N A CH Notus SSSA Notused o aa Notus S NAN Notused NA NAA Notused NANA Notused o SNA NA Notused o SNA NA Notus o aa Counting area for pulse output Elapsed words CHO YO Y1 words PLS CHO The target value is set when instructions F171 SPDH N A F172 PLSH F174 SPOH VAER and F175 SPSH are u words executed Counting area for pulse output Elapsed words CH01 Y2 Y3 value area words Lower PLS CH1 The target value is set when Target words instructions F171 SPDH A NWA F172 PLSH F174 SPOH eaaa and F175 SPSH are T executed words 14 2 Table of Basic Instructions so ia Begins a logic operation with a Form A normally open contact bev se Begins a logic operation with a Form B normally closed contact YR LE Outputs the operated result to the specified er pr pet A allelei Inverts the operated result up to this rtf recon OE TEM Heepet po Se ge eee orem Lo fol ofolefolo serially XYRTCL PE Con nects a Form B normally closed contact pens Ne eal a o ofofolofolo ae A rT Connects a Form A normally open contact in amp lolo ololololo 1 parallel XYRTGLAE RTGLRE Connects a Form B normally close
232. r process piles 368 to 383 Step ladder process oer 384 to 399 Step ladder process peewee 400 to 415 DT90086 Step ladder process 416 to 431 Indicates the startup condition of the step Step ladder process ladder process When the process starts up DT90087 7 432 to 447 the bit corresponding to the process number Step ladder process turns on Aranoa 448 to 463 pT90089 SteP ladder process Monitor using binary display 464 to 479 A A Step ladder process lt Example gt DT90090 15 11 li 3 480 to 495 DT90090 Step ladder process 15 11 7 3 0 Process No DT90091 496 to 51 1 1 Executing 0 Not executing Step ladder process DT90092 oo to 527 A programming tool software can be used to Step ladder process Write data Oa 528 to 543 Step ladder process eee 544 to 559 Step ladder process AADA 560 to 575 Step ladder process 576 to 591 Step ladder process 592 to 607 DT90096 DT90097 14 27 A Available N A Not available mames one sion ua DT90107 pa pepe process B t ae Indicates the startup condition of the step DT90108 asi Ks 7 pees ladder process When the process starts up Step ladder process the bit corresponding to the process number DT90109 784 to 799 turns on DT90110 Step ladder process Monitor using binary display 800 to 815 A A DT90111 Step ladder process lt Example gt 15 1 7 3 0 Bit No 816 to 831 oTs0100 oo ooo o DT 2 Step ladder process t 655 a 651 t 64
233. rate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contents are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Unit Units installed exceed the limitations i e 4 or installation mores orc units AIA AI A AIAIA Turn off the power and re configure units error referring to the hardware manual Probably an abnormality in the system register A Check the system register setting or initialize the system registers 1 This error occurs on FP X Ver2 0 or later A Available 14 67 Opera tion Description and steps to take status A parameter error was detected in the Stops MEWNET W2 configuration area Set a correct parameter Stops Probab a hardware abnormality Stops P Please contact your dealer An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to Stops noise is possible gt Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred Stops Check the number of the interrupt program and change it to agree with the interrupt request CPU2 This error occurs when a FP3 FP10SH is used as CPU2 for a multi CPU system Stops Refer to Multi CPU system Manual An abnormal unit is installed
234. rate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The clock calendar can be set by writing a value using a programming tool software or a program that uses the FO MV instruction Higher byte Lower byte Minute data Second data Day data Hour data DT90055 H01 to H31 HOO to H23 Year data Month data DT90056 H00 to H99 H01 to H12 Day of the week As a day of the week is not automatially set on FPWIN GR fix what day is set to 00 and set each value for 00 to 06 A Available N A Not available jAaaress nome E eserpton g ing DT90058 Clock calendar time setting gt For L40 L60 lt is used to adjust the time of the built in clock calendar When setting the clock calendar by program By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction lt Example gt Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on A A X0 DF Fo mv H 0 DT90054 MPuls 9 minutes FO Mv H 512 DT90055 inputs 1an FO MV H8000 DT90058 Sets the time Note If the values of DT90054 to DT90057 are Changed with the programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 DT90059 Communication error Error code Is stored here when a N A N
235. ration error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal wn display The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous N A address Monitor the address using decimal display Z h N h A Available N A Not available ae Read Writ The data stored here is increased by one every ee 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF DT90019 Noe2 Difference between the values of the two points counter absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points The data stored here is increased by one every 10 67 us HO to HFFFF 10 us ring counter Difference between the values of the two points DT90020 Note2 Notes absolute value x 10 67 us Elapsed time between the two points Note The exact value is 10 67 us DT90021 Notused The current scan time is stored here Scan time is Scan time current calculated using the formula DT90022 value Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The minimum scan time is stored here Scan time Scan time is calculated using the formula DT90023 minimum value g _ Note1 Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms i The maximum scan time is stored here The scan Scenume time is calculated using the formula DT90024 maximum value a o Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K125 in
236. rcuit 3 6 3 1 4 Terminal layout AFPX E16R Input terminal COM COM x1 X3 X5 COM COM XO Eg X4 X6 Relations between the output terminals and COM terminals Y1 MWCO TO L1 Y2 to Y4 C2 S to Y7 C3 Output terminal AFPX E16T AFPX E16P Input terminal Input terminal Poo et tee eee Ge a ee 9 f I l I d es ar Cee ET ENET EA X3 OM COM 7 SS OIG Nc Nef eee ys yz en Seeee eee Power supply for YO to Y7 eer used Output terminal Not used Output terminal AFPX E16X AFPX E14YR Input terminal Output terminal Relations between the output terminals and COM terminals Y1 C0 COM COM X9 XB XD XF Yo c1 com com xs xA xc xe Y to Y4 C2 a Y5 to Y7 C3 Y8 to YA C4 YB to YD C5 ee ee EE eee Input terminal Not used Output terminal Not used Output terminal 3 AFPX E30R AC power supply terminals Input Service power supply terminals for input output AFPX E30RD DC power supply terminal input Input terminals x3 x5 x7 x9 XB XD Relation between output com xo terminals and COM terminals yo C0 Y1 C1 Y2 to Y5 C2 Y6 to Y9 C3 YA to YD C4 Output terminals Input terminal Relation between output terminals and COM terminals yo C0 Y1 M Ci _ nc
237. read and write the pulse number counted by the pulse output control Specify this F1 DMV instruction in combination with the pulse output elapsed area after the special data register DT90400 When executing the F1 DMV instruction with DT90400 the elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of the special data registers DT90400 and DT90401 The elapsed values can be read or written with this F1 DMV instruction only Example 1 Writing the elapsed value X7 Set the initial value K3000 in the pulse output DF F1 DMV K3000 DT90400 CHO Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X8 Read the elapsed value of the pulse output DF F1 DMV DT90400 DT100 CHO to DT100 and DT101 Elapsed value area Channel No Pulse output elapsed value area CHO DT90400 to DT90401 CH1 DT90410 to DT90411 Note The elapsed value area varies during scanning Replace it with an arbitrary data register at the beginning of the program as necessary in cases such as using it several times in the program 7 20 7 4 7 JOG Operation Instruction F172 This instruction is used to output pulses according to a specified parameter when the trigger execution condition is on When the trigger execution condition turns off deceleration is performed within a specified deceleration time However if the trigger turns on again acceleration is performed up to the target speed again When the deceleration stop is requ
238. register 46 in the home No 3 or 11 ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting the values in DT90231 System regis the home unit are copied in the system ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47 DT90232 System regis When the system register 46 in the home PCIPLC ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting the registers DT90233 1i System regis 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home iia ter 42 and 43 unit mentioned in the left column will be System regis changed to 50 to 55 and 5 7 and the PLIES e system register 46 will be set as it is ee ee System regis Also the system registers 40 to 45 ter 46 and 47 corresponding to other units will be System regis Changed to the values which the received DT90236 ter 40 and 41 values are corrected and the registers 46 PC PLC System regis and 57 in the home unit are set for the DT90237 link ter 42 and 43 registers 46 and 47 Unit i System regis DT90238 station Pe No 5 or 13 7 an 2 DT90239 ystem regis ter 46 and 47 14 31 A Available N A Not available Address Name Desorption hg ing Ing ing System regis Ta ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System regis Unit DT90242 station System regis No 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45 System regis DT30243 ter 46 and 47 DT90244 System regis ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System regis Unit sta or 15 ter 44 and 45 ter 46 and 47 System regis ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System regis ial link ter 42 and 43 Unit sta
239. rent status of the password PLE Home setting Current status gt Password ig not set Close Specify the type of the password to be used Available retry counts 3 counts e Specify an operation mode digit number a Access Accesses programs by inputting a 4 digits Hex password Protect Sets a password Operation Made Unprotect Releases the password setting Access Input a password S ien Those are the settings when using the FP ea Drprotect memory loader Ver 2 0 or later 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 8 2 Confirmation of the password settings Current status Indicates the current status of the password setting There are following five statuses Password is not set Password is not set 4 digits Protect Four digit password and access is prohibited 4 digits Available to access Four digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs 8 digits Available to access Eight digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs Available retry counts This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession You can input up to three times and every time incorrect password is input the number will decrease If you f
240. rget speed 10 kHz Acceleraiton time 100 ms Deceleration time 1000 ms Movement amount 30000 pulses Example of timing chart Acceleration time Deceleration time Frequency J o0ms 1000ms Target speed 10kHz as Initial speed 1kHz i Time Positioning operation start R10 Positioning operation running R100 F171 instruction execution R101 Positioning operation complete gon A Pulse output instruction flag R9120 Data table paia Setting item Unity o e of Settable range register No sample program H1000 0000 DT100 Control code Incremental mea bo Tne CONTO GOGE On ne CW CCW pei K1 to K20000 L14 L30 type DT102 Initial speed Hz K1000 K1 to K50000 L40 L60 type K1 to K20000 L14 L30 type DT104 Target speed Hz K10000 K1 to K50000 L40 L60 Kt to KS0000 L40 60 type _ DT106 Acceleration time m K100 K1 to K1 to K32760 DT108 Deceleration time m K1000 K1 to K32760 DT110 Target value pulses K30000 K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 1 21 Sample program R10 R9120 R102 R100 DF R100 R100 R101 DF o R101 F1 DMV H10000000 DT 100 J F1 DMV K1000 DT102 4 F1 DMV K10000 DT104 F1 DMV K100 DT106 4 F1 DMV K1000 DT 108 4 F1 DMV K30000 DT 110 4 F171SPDH DT 100 KO 4 R9120 R100 TO R102 DF R102 Control code 1000 Fixed 0 Execution in main program 1 Execution during interrupt program Trigger is level type E
241. rol unit PASSER X10 to X1F FP X0 L60MR control unit YO to YD Output 28 points Y10 to Y1D 12 8 12 2 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Number of points and range of memory area available for use Function L14 L30 L40 L60 External input 960 points 1760 points Turns on or off based on external mote XO to X59F XO to X109F input ae on ounput on ae Ve oe Externally outputs on or off state Internal relay 1008 points RO 4096 points Relay which turns on or off only within Note2 R RO to R255F program vote to R63F Link relay Non 2048 points This relay is a shared relay used for L se LO to L127F PLC link This goes on when the timer reaches the specified time It corresponds to the timer number This goes on when the counter increments It corresponds to the counter number Relay which turns on or off based on specific conditions and is used as a flag Code for speciyfying 16 external input points as one word 16 bits of data Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data Timer T 256 points TO to T249 C250 to C255 Note3 1024 points TO to 11007 C1008 to C1023 Note3 Counter C Special internal relay R External input Note1 WX 224 points from R9000 224 points from R9000 110 words WX0 WX0 to WX59 to WX109 External output
242. rrupt input based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the communication conditions of the COM port or tool port for MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the operation mode of the high speed counter based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC link function Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps 2 With FP 32k type the 8 digit password can be selected 3 With FP 32k type and FP X Ver1 10 or later it can be used 4 Available for FP X0 L40 and L60 types only FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH 14 39 z A op FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Data Data compare instructions instructions 16 bit data 16 bit data compare ST Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 5 alala bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 ff ST lt gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 lt gt 51 52 5 L bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 STs LC gt 51 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 ST Begins a logic operation by
243. s of the return Pulse output P S n Outputs a pulse from the specified JOG operation output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table data table beginning at 9 beginning at S LS F170 PWM output PWM S n Performs PWM output from the specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPOR FP X0 S Performs high speed counter and DT90052 Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 r Change and read DMV S Transfers S 1 S to high speed of the elapsed DT90300 counter and Pulse output elapsed 7 value of high value area DT90045 DT90044 speed counter and DT90300 Transfers value in high speed Pulse output counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D a i counter and Pulse output controls Cam control Controls cam operation on off patterns of each cam output according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter Target value much HC1S Turns output Yn on when the on elapsed value of the high speed High speed counter or pulse output reaches counter the target value of S 1 S control Pulse output control Target value much HC1R n S D Turns output Yn off when the off elapsed value of the high speed i counter or pulse output reaches the target value of S 1 S
244. s to 400 ms Note If there are any units that have not been added to the link the setting should not be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs connected to the link If a short waiting time has been set there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their power supply is on The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms 6 44 Error detection time for transmission assurance relays The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off it takes as a default value 6 4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations This time period can be shortened using the SYS1 instruction lt Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1T1 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC PLC link transmission assurance is off from the default value of 6400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1T1 Permissible range for key word no 2 100 to 6400 100 ms to 6400 ms ner Note The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any problems The SYS1 instruction should be exec
245. sage is sent Computer Transmission program Reception processing program The unit number of the PLC Cer that sent the response Confirmation of whether or not the processing was carried out successfully The unit number of the PLC The type of command to which the command is _ Processed being sent D If the command was used to 2 The type of command Deni data the data that was 3 Any settings and data N required in order to execute stearate pial the the command processed successfully the v content of the error The command and data are v sent to the PLC with the specified unit number A response is returned and processed by the computer e g the computer retrieves the data that was sent Response message PLC 6 8 Format of command and response Command message All command related items should be noted in the text segment The unit number must be specified before sending the command Header Unit no of destination 01 to 99 decimal 3 Text Content depends on type of command m Check code BCC hexadecimal ma Terminator Specified item 5 specifies that only 1 point should be read Command name e g read contact area Command code Indicates that this is a command digit digit Target that reads the value internal relay R1 1 Header Start code Commands must always have a ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C at the beginning of a message The n
246. scan after RUN 1 Incoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word area of the receive buffer Header and terminator start and end codes are not stored Beginning of reception Re opening Received data A T Sp R9038 ON OFF Execution condition R10 Reception Reception is Reception is possible not possible is possible Execution of F159 MTRN 2 When the terminator end code is received the reception done flag R9038 turns on Reception of any further data is prohibited When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not turn on Check the number of received bytes to judge whether the reception has completed or not 3 When an F159 MTRN instruction is executed the reception done flag R9038 turns off except the case when the terminator has been set to None the number of received bytes is cleared and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower order byte For repeated reception of data perform the following steps 1 Receive data 2 Reception done R9038 on reception prohibited 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159 MTRN R9038 off reception possible 5 Receive subsequent data Prepare for reception The reception done flag R9038 turns on when data reception from the external device is completed RO F159 MTRN DT100 Ko K1 Reception of any further data is prohibited To repeate
247. set to op bit 1 bit G j l Set ae eneral purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data oes communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note1 The communication format in a PC PLC link is fixed at the following settings Data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps Note2 The general purpose communication of the tool port is only available in RUN mode In PROG mode the computer link mode is always used regardless of settings Data length D fm 8 n ts O J Q r O A O O 14 9 Default Description value p Controller input time constant setting 1 X0 to X3 gt For L14 L30 L40 L60 Controller input time constant setting 1 X4 to X7 gt For L14 L30 L40 L60 Controller input time constant setting 2 X8 to XB gt For L30 L40 L60 Controller input time constant setting 2 XC to XF gt For L30 L40 L60 ins Controller input time constant setting 3 X10 to X13 gt For L40 L60 Controller input time constant setting 3 X14 to X17 gt For L40 L60 Controller input time constant setting 4 X18 to X1B gt For L60 Controller input time const
248. sion converted result is stored in the l j D 1 D binary data PGBIN x O O D conversion S binary data and the converted result is stored in the D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S to binary data and the converted Crore f 32 bit gray code DGBIN binary data PDGBIN Dji conversion result is stored in the D 1 D Bit line to bit COLM n D The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are column PCOLM stored in bit n of D to DC 15 xoja Ojo conversion line conversion PLINE are stored in bits 0 to 15 of D we Ws lt I aes ASCII conversion n D multiple ASCII data ee ia ASCII gt binary ATOB S1 S2 Converts multiple ASCII data to a eee a stern TO PSS Casein eel olen ofa fx gt pee data check ROMS nt S sedin 251 ATOR nstacton 1 feles o x x n used in F251 ATOB instruction acy a l Comparing SCMP 1 S2 These instructions compare two character strings specified character strings and output the judgment results to a special internal relay i character string with another S S couplino S D These instructions determine the number of characters in a character S n Pa F237 P237 F238 P238 F240 P240 O gt Q O pa r gt Ko 5 paa Cc O Number of LEN characters in a character string string Search for SSRC The specified character is searched character string in a character
249. ss cable Belden 9207 Shielded wa Hitachi Cable twisted ae Bisse pee Lid KPEV pair ductor Way y l l S0 5 mm x 1P M A Polychlo VCTF 0 5 Con T i k l rinated l l 2 l ductor biphenyl 0 6 mm mm x 2C JIS Note Use shielded twisted pair cables Use only one type of transmission cable Do not mix more than 1 type Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line grounded one end If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 use the wires of the same cross sectional area which is 0 5 mm 5 6 3 Setting of Baud Rate For L40MR and L60MR types Confirm the baud rate setting before installation when using the COM port Baud rate switch 115 200bps 19 200bps 5 12 5 Handling of Backup Battery For L40 and L60 types 5 7 1 What Backup Battery Does Install an optional backup battery when the hold area is insufficient in the initial state or for using the clock calender function Areas backed up with the battery PEME Hold area when battery Hold area when battery Classification j ioe is not installed is installed C1008 C1023 E1008 EV1023 Hold areas or non hold areas Elapsed value area can be specified arbitrarily by Operation Internal relay R2480 R255F setting the system registers memory Data register DT7890 R8191 No 6 to No 13
250. string RIGHT LEFT MIDW Retrieving data from character strings left side D 3 D i S1 S2 These instructions retrieve a D specified number of characters from the right side of the character string D z S1 S2 These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the left side of the character string Retrieving a character string from a character string the specified position in the character string Writing a S1 S2 These instructions write a specified character string D number of characters from a to a character character string to a specified string position in the character string Replacing S D p A specified number of characters in character strings n a character string are rewritten starting from a specified position in the character string Q Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later Retrieving data from character strings right id S1 S2 These instructions retrieve a S3 D character string consisting of a specified number of characters from 10 NO NO oR C C3 eo C C C4 I U TI U TI U T SS SS SSS A O O o 00 14 56 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope ee A Boolean p Description rand Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum value S1
251. sts rotation is carried out when the rotation direction Sian YS Bes ha l direction sign signals is ON Incremental counting Decremental counting 7 14 Operation mode Incremental lt Relative value control gt Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected Mode Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON CW CCW Pulse output when Pulse output from CW direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Positive Pulse output Negative from CCW Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting Method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 6000 Absolute lt Absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected Mode Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON CW CCW Pulse output when direction output is Target value greater than Pulse output current value oN OFF Target value Pulse output when Pulse output i i less than direction output is from CCW current value ON Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON P
252. switching due to F14 PGRD instruction IC memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged IC card read Stops Writing is disabled error There is an abnormality in the AUTOEXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larger than the capacity of the CPU gt lnstall an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the read once again Abnormal I O unit FP x FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FP expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP2 FP2SH Sele Check the contents of special data registers I O error table DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available 14 69 14 70 Intelligent unit error I O unit verify error Opera tion status Description and steps to take An abnormality in an intelligent unit FPx FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operatio
253. t 5 0 1010 010 0 6 D n Shifts the n bits of D to the left 510 101010 2 B D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D tothe right 5 G O O O D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data s5 xlolololololo area specified by D 1 D to the left ne aan ele ane es J Right shift of multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data Left shift of multiple SHL bits n bits in a 16 bit PSHL data Right shift of n bits in DSHR a 32 bit data PDSHR Oo o Left shift of n bits in DSHL a 32 bit data PDSHL Right shift of one BSR hexadecimal digit 4 PBSR bit Shifts the one digit of data of D to the right 2 f e Left shift of one BSL hexadecimal digit 4 PBSL Shifts the one digit of data of D to the s o o ofo left 3 alalalalea bit bits n bits PBITR n D1 and D2 to the right se re ren bits n bits PBITL jn D1 and D2 to the left a Pesca Ica iad ka agi ha word 16 bit PWSHR D1 and D2 to the right a haa anal i 4 Left shift of one word WSHL D1 D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by fsjojololo 7 16 bit D1 and D2 to the left dia Right shift of one WBSR D i Oloje D1 D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSR and D2 to the right 5 O O O O 8 bit D1 D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by me 5 LA A oO fe
254. t constant time intervals 1 When the sampling operation stops 1 nave Sample tageiend nag When the sampling operation starts 0 Sampling stop trigger When the sampling stop trigger activates 1 flag When the sampling stop trigger stops 0 When sampling starts 1 Sampling enable flag When sampling stops 0 14 13 WR903 FP X0 Address R9030 Turns on when the general purpose communication function is being used Goes off when any function other than the general purpose communication function is being used PR instruction flag Off Printing is not executed On Execution is in progress Rewriting during RUN Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a R9034 done flag rewrite during the RUN operation R9036 Notused e COM1 port Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data R9037 communication error COmmMUNGANGN flag Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction COM1 port mode flag COM1 port reception done flag during Turns on when the terminator is received during general general purpose serial purpose serial communication communication COM1 port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose serial Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose serial communication TOOL port reception done flag during general purpose communication
255. t in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the m nny A x x comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ac bie a or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the pP 5152 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ANFe Connects a Form A normally open contact ff 8182 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S14 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ORF lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in pse 5 31 52 p si s2 gt parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in _pFe s1 82 point type _pFe gt si s25_ r comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact Connects a Form A normally open contact parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the Feo si 82 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instru
256. t in High speed Counter Number of Channel There are four channels for the built in high speed counter The channel number allocated for the high speed counter will change depending on the function being used Counting range K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Coded 32 bit binary The built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there Yy Max value 2 147 483 647 2 147 483 646 2 147 483 645 2 147 483 646 2 147 483 647 Min value 2 147 483 648 7 3 7 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 7 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function Input contact numser used Minimum Maximum Channel No value in Control Elapsed Target input pulse counting parenthesis is flag value area value area Note2 reset input width speed XO DT90300 DT90302 X4 R9110 DT90301 DT90303 X1 DT90304 DT90306 pene prane X5 i DT90305 DT90307 L14 L30 25us Incremental i X2 DT90308 DT90310 L40 L60 10us ecremeate X6 Boe DT90309 DT90311 X3 DT90312 DT90314 X7 PARI DT90313 DT90315 2 phase XO X1 DT90300 DT90302 2 phase input gas X4 RS DT90301 DT90303 One input L14 L30 25us Direction X2 X3 R9112 DT90308 DT90310 L40 L60 25us Ae eiai X6 DT90309 DT
257. t station number is 8 relays and register have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 8 16 x 4 119 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 119 11 43 ms Each Ts 5 11 43 16 43ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 8 2 79 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 16 43 x 8 2 79 5 139 23 ms Calculation example 5 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 32 64 x 4 407 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 407 39 072 ms Each Ts 5 39 072 44 072 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 44 072 x 2 1 632 5 94 776 ms Calculation example 6 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 32 relays and 2 register words have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 1 1 x 4 31 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 31 2 976 ms Each Ts 1 2 976 3 976 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 3 976 x 2 1 632 1 10 584 ms nF Note In the descripti
258. ter 6 31 Operation of PLC link ianierers Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other y PLCs on the same network Hikredisiei Changing the contents of a link register in one PLC changes the values of the g same link register in all other PLCs on the same network Link relay If the link relay LO in unit No 1 is turned on the status change is fed back to the ladder programs of other units and YO of the other units is output No 2 Link register 7775 No 3 Link register No 4 Link register RO 4 J M Fo mv Kroo Loo No 1 Link register 7 LOO 100 o Link register A constant of 100 is written to link register LDO of unit no 1 The contents of LDO in the other units are also changed to a constant of 100 6 32 6 6 2 Setting of Unit Numbers By default the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers In a PC PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line the unit number must be set in order to identify the different PLCs The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register Precautions on the unit number settings Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network The same number must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between t
259. ters and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled Editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming tool However the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched When using this function store ladder programs as files without fail Interaction with the password protect function The password setting can be specified simultaneously for the PLC in which this function is set This function can be also set in a password protected PLC eS ner Note When performing Release the upload protection by compulsion All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us We cannot read the data of the PLC in which the program upload protection has been set Keeping your programs is your responsibility 8 2 2 Setting Method Use the programming tool to set the upload protection on the control unit Upload protection setting with FPWIN GR 1 Select Online gt Online Edit Mode in the menu bar and press the CTRL and F2 keys The screen is switched to Online Monitor 2 Select Tool gt Upload settings in the menu bar The Upload settings dialog box is displayed Upload settings Untitle1 mj Close C Release the upload protection by compulsion Help 3 Select Set the PLC cannot be uploaded and press the Execute
260. the MEWNET WO max 16 units with the twisted pair cables In a PC PLC link data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays called link relays L and data registers called link registers LD Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same network Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the same network The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network such as target production values and type codes can easily be implemented to coordinate the data and the data of all units are updated at the same time Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 No 1 No 1 Send area Receive area gt ae Receive area Receive area FP X0 FP X0 RS485 The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs PLCs connectable to the PC link via MEWNET W0O FP X0 L40MR and L60MR FP2 Multi Communication Unit Using Communication cassette RS485 type FP X Using Communication cassette RS485 type FPX Using Communication cassette RS485 type FPOR Using a commercial RS232C RS485 conver
261. the connectors of the control unit and expansion unit Fold the expansion cable to touch the units each other As for the expansion unit at the last position turn on the terminator setting switch Install the expansion cover _ TERM switches Nonterminal expansion units All OFF Terminal expansion unit All ON There is an insertion direction for the expansion cable IEF ner The total length of the expansion cables should be within 160 cm Keep the expansion cables away from the devices and wirings generating noises as much as possible When the terminal unit is the expansion FFO adapter set all the switches to OFF 5 5 5 3 Power Supply 5 3 1 AC Power Supply Wiring of power supply Separate the wiring systems to the control unit and the I O devices The wire should be 2mm AWG14 or larger and twisted Seeoeeooo Breaker Use the isolation transformer Power supply terminal supplies 100 240 V AC in situations of excess noise Earth terminal Grounding 100M0 or less Rated input voltage ATOM EETE NE VO TAgE Rated frequnecy Allowable frequency amplitude range range 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz eS Note Using the power supply of the outlying voltage and frequency or using inappropriate wires may cause the fault of the power supply of the PLC Isolation of power supply systems Isolate the wiring systems to the PLC output d
262. the detection of battery error without power the battery should be replaced as soon as possible Note If a week has passed without power after the special internal relays R9005 and R9006 turned on or the ERR LED flashed retained memory data may be lost Regardless of how much time has passed after the detection of battery error supply power to the control unit for more than five minutes before replacing the battery Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will be on when a battery error is detected regardless of the setting of system register No 4 5 8 Safety Measures 5 8 1 Safety Measures Precautions regarding system design In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons e Power on timing differences between the PLC system and input output or mechanical power apparatus e Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs e Abnormality in the PLC unit external power supply or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate safety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit externally Emergency stop circuit Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device Start up sequence The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the
263. time ms K500 K1 to K382760 K1 to K20000 L14 L30 type DT210 Creep speed Hz K500 K1 to K50000 L40 L60 type KO Not output deviation counter KO Not output clear signal K1 to K200 x 0 5ms 0 5ms 100ms Deviation counter clear signal output time 1 25 Sample program R20 R9120 R202 R200 DF R200 R200 R201 DF w E R201 F1 DMV H10010010 DT200 F1 DMV K1000 DT 202 F1 DMV K5000 DT 204 F1 DMV K300 DT206 F1 DMV K500 DT 208 F1 DMV K500 DT 210 F1 DMV KO _ pT 212 F177 HOME DT200 KO X0 Ho yp 7 miii Fo MV H 110 DT 90052 FO MV H 100 DT 90052 R9120 R200 T10 R202 LDF R202 TMX 10 K 3 Control code 10 Fixed E Control assignment 0 Home return E Control assignment type 0 Home return type 0 0 Home return type 1 00 Fixed E Operation mode assignment 0 Forward 1 Reverse E Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 7 26 7 4 9 Trapezoidal Control Instruction F171 This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table while the trigger execution condition is on When the deceleration stop is requested by the FO instruction during the pulse output the deceleration stop is performed The explanation below shows the case that pulses are output from YO with the following conditions Initial speed 1 kHz Ta
264. tion 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block Suitable terminals Suitable wire M3 terminal screws are used for the terminal The following suitable solderless terminals are recommended for the wiring to the terminals Fork type terminal Round type terminal 6 mm or less i 6 mm or TO 3 2 mm or more 3 2 mm or more Suitable solderless terminals Shae PartNo Suitable wires mm sme sass oases JST Mfg Co Ltd yp Round type 2 MS3 Fork iypE gt N3A 1 04 to 2 63 Suitable wires Suitable wires Tightening torque AWG22 to 14 0 3 to 2 0 mm Tightening torque The tightening torque should be 0 5 to 0 6 Nem Connection to the terminal block When using the round type terminal remove the terminal cover IEF vr Install the terminal block cover as it was after wiring to prevent electric shock 5 6 Setting and Wiring of COM Port RS485 5 6 1 Connection of COM Port Wiring should extend from one unit to the next between terminals and terminals as below Never run two wires from a single unit to two other units In the unit that serves as the terminal station connect the E terminal and terminal For terminal units connect E and E 24V JHE I i 5 6 2 Selection of Transmission Cables Please use the following cables as transmission cables Appropriate electrical cables twisted cables Conductor Insulator Cross sectional Resist Sample ance Thick appropriate ne
265. tion of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing Take care regarding this point lt Example 1 gt Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions xO me 0 x1 Yo Hor MCE 0 Time chart 1 xO Xi YO X1 was on when 4 XO became off The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is not obtained Time chart 2 XO xi YO X1 was off when J j XO became off The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is obtained lt Example 2 gt Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions RO P 1 X0 CT 100 X1 LBL 1 Time chart 1 RO XO Counting operation Final timing at which the R Liis count is not incremented because the final timing at which the previous JP instruction was not executed JP instruction was not executed has not been change and the execution condition XO for the counter input has not changed Time chart 2 RO XO Counting operation fi Final timing at which the previous The count is not incremented because the count input changed from off to on JP instruction was not executed after the final timing at which the previous JP instruction was not executed 11 6 11 3 Precautions for Programming Programs which are not executed correctly When
266. to No 14 are necessary PLC Configuration Untitle1 Sai Hald Non hald 2 Ho 5 Counter starting address E 0 1 024 Action an Error Maier No 6 Hold type area starting address for timer counter 1008 0 1024 Link 0 1 Coni ole moisia AS No Hold type area starting word address ag 0 256 Controller output settings PLS PPh po MSHI Interrupt pulse catch settings No 8 Hold type area starting address for data registers 7890 0 681921 Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input No 14 Step Ladder hold E Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input L60R Only No 4 Leading edge differential during MC holds the previous value Tool Port COM Port Cancel Bead PLC Initialize Help Ea Note When Battery Error Alarm is not set the ERR LED will not flash even if a battery error is detected Note that data may be lost as the result of the battery shutoff The setting of the system registers Nos 6 to 14 are effective only when the backup battery is installed Without the battery use at the default settings If changing the settings the Hold Non hold operation becomes unstable 5 14 5 7 3 Replacement of Backup Battery The procedure for replacing the backup battery is as follows Procedure 1 Supply power to the control unit for more than five minutes Charge the built in capacitor to retain the contents of t
267. to the left F125 32 bit data right DROR D n Rotates the number of bits specified P125 rotate PDROR by n of the double words data 32 slxlo bits specified by D 1 D to the o right F126 32 bit data left DROL D n Rotates the number of bits specified P126 rotate PDROL by n of the double words data 32 5 x O oO bits specified by D 1 D to the left F127 32 bit data right DRCR Rotates the number of bits specified P127 rotate with carry PDRCR by n of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the right i flag R9009 data F128 32 bit data left D Rotates the number of bits specified P128 rotate with carry by n of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the left together with carry flag R9009 data Bit manipulation instructions 16 bit data bitset BTS PBTS Sets the value of bit position n of Sets the value of bit position n of the data of D to 1 D n n pa ner 16 bit data bit reset BTR D n n PBTR the data of D to 0 16 bit data invert BTI D n Inverts the value of bit position n o PBTI the data of D 16 bit data bit test BTT D n Tests the value of bit position n of PBTT the data of D and outputs the result to R900B Number of on 1 BCU S D Stores the number of on bits in the bits in 16 bit data PBCU data of S in D Number of on 1 DBCU S D S
268. tor is included in the stored data 6 5 2 Programming Example of General purpose Serial Communication The F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified communication port F159 MTRN instruction Data is sent and received via the specified COM port RO S n D H F159 MTRN DT100 K8 K1 Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes are sent from the communication K1 port ir _ e Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices that can be specified for n WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD I I0 to ID K H Devices that can be specified for D Only the K constants KO and K1 only Sending data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the COM port specified by D Data can be sent with the start code and end code automatically attached When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from communication port Receiving data Data can be received when the reception done flag is off The received data is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register When the reception of the data is completed the terminator is received the reception done flag R9038 turns on and subsequently re
269. tores the number of on bits in the bits in 32 bit data PDBCU data of S 1 S in D Q Available lt Not available Not available partially 14 49 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH hee WN n a o i Heri Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary timer STMR S D Turns on the specified output and slo alolola 16 bit R900D after 0 01 s x set value Oe ee Special instructions SS OS F139 Seconds to P139 hours P140 R9009 set PSTC a ee ee ee a a a Turns off the carry flag R9009 m m R9009 reset PCLC S es rs rn Special instructions F138 Hours min S D Converts the hour minute and second P138 utes and sec data of S 1 S to seconds data and onds to the converted data is stored in D 1 D seconds data S D Converts the seconds data of S 1 S nal to hour minute and second data minutes and and the converted data is stored in seconds data D 1 D Watching dog timer update Partial I O update Serial data communica tion control mee WDT PWDT IORF D1 D2 PIORF B a The time allowable scan time for the system of watching dog timer is changed to S x 0 1 ms for that scan Updates the I O from the number specified by D1 to the number specified by D2 The COM port received flag R9038 is set to off to enable reception Beginning at S n bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM port iil ll the MOD bus master via COM port as the MOD
270. tput Y2 Y3 Pulse output Y2 Y3 Home input X7 PWM output Y2 Normal output Y3 xO XI Controller input The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch input sO Aq Controller input Me AS Ad AS AG NI Me AS Ad AS AG AF The pressed contact is set for the interrupt input XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Leading edge XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Trailing edge The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge Note1 The controller output settings must be specified for using the pulse output and PWM output The output specified for the pulse output and PWM output cannot be used as normal output Note2 X5 can be also used as the home input of the pulse output CHO to CH1 For using the home return function of pulse output be sure to make the home input settings In that case X2 cannot be set as the high speed counter Note3 L14 type For the pulse output CHO the home return cannot be performed with the deviation counter clear Note4 L30 L40 L60 type When performing the home return with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CHO Y3 should be set to the normal output as the Y3 is used for the deviation counter clear signal For the pulse output CH1 the home return cannot be performed with the deviation counter clear Note5 The settings of Nos 403 to 405 are specified for each contact on the screen 14 7 Add Default ar Co os o a O O D Unit No setting 1 to 99 Communication Comair Computer link mode sett
271. tput instructions F171 to F177 4 Near home Enables the near home input when executing the home return input instruction F177 Allocates an arbitrary input to the near home input 5 Deceleration Forcibly stops the pulse output during the execution of the pulse stop request output instructions F171 to F177 FP X0 Pulse output control flag area 15 12 11 8 The area DT90052 for writing channels and T 4 3 0 DT90052 aes es Bee control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure Channel specification HO to H1 CHO to CH1 ed at H1 PLS l l Control codes written with an FO MV Deceleration stop request 0 Invalid 1 Valid instruction are stored by ehannel in special Near home input O Invalid 1 Valid data register DT90380 to DT90383 Stop of Pulse output Continue 1 Stop Note Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes Pulse output control flag monitor area Channel No Control code monitor area CHO DT90380 CH1 DT90381 7 4 5 Forced Stop Deceleration Stop F0 Instruction Pulse output control instruction F0 Forced stop and deceleration stop is executed by FO MV instruction in combination with the special data register DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example Performing the forced stop of pulse output For CHO For CH1 X7 X8 HDF F0 MV H108 DT90052 HDF F0 Mv H1108 DT90052 FO MV H 100 DT9
272. tput terminals Service power supply terminals for input output Note1 Do not connect anything to the unused teminals NC Note2 Do not connect the service power supply terminals for input and other DC power supply in parallel AFPXOL40MR AC power supply terminals Input DC input terminals M ae lees De ee es a AEAEE X12 kaeT Ld LE COM port Transistor output terminals Relay output terminals terminals RS485 Service power supply terminals for input output Note Do not connect the service power supply terminals for input and other DC power supply in parallel 2 13 AFPXOL60R AC power supply terminals Input DC input terminals 1 Not used DC input terminals 2 i 2 2 5 2 Sl a 2 J 2 ol 2 OO _ Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q O OO OO O Q i AE pt N Com X1 x3 xs x7 X9 XB XD XF _ com xo x2 x4 x6 xa xa XC XE Nc 24v pov yi Ys cof Yei c1 Y9 YB ee eS SSH LJ Not used Transistor output Relay output terminals 1 Not used Relay output terminals 2 terminals 1 Service power supply terminals for input output Note1 Do not connect anything to the unused teminals NC Note2 Do not connect the service power supply terminals for input and other DC power supply in parallel AFPXOL60MR AC power supply terminals Input DC input terminals 1 Not used DC input terminals 2 A 2 2 5l AI 5 J ol
273. ts of IO are a negative value RO H FO MV DTO ioDTO 2 Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD lt BIN data conversion lt Example gt When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted In this case if DTO contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4 conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result RO 1 F81 BIN DTO DT100 lt Example gt When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted In this case if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999 an operation error will occur RO F80 BCD DT1 DT101 3 Check if the devisor of a division instruction is 0 lt Example gt In this case if the content of DT100 is 0 an operation error will occur RO H F32 DTO DT100 DT200 10 8 Chapter 11 Precautions During Programming 11 1 Use of Duplicated Output Double Coil 11 1 1 Duplicated Output Double Coil What is duplicated output double coil Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a sequence program If the same output is specified for the OT and KP instructions it is considered to be duplicated output Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions such as the SET RST instruction or high level instruction such as data transfer it is not regarded as duplicated output If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists it will be normally flagged as
274. ulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 1000 7 4 3 VO Allocation Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW CCW The I O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW lt When using CH0 gt FP X0 Home input Near home XS input xo river vo CW output Yi CCW output XO or any other input can be specified for the near home input Single pulse input driver lt When using CH2 gt _FP XO_ Home input Near home KT F input x1 river v CW output Y3 CCW output X1 or any other input can be specified for the near home input pulse input and directional switching input method One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output The I O allocation of pulse output terminal direction output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used Near home inp
275. umber of characters that can be sent in one frame differs depending on the start code Type of header No of characters that can be sent in 1 frame Max 118 characters FP XO all types Max 2048 characters L40 L40MR L60 L6OMR 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified In 1 1 communication the unit number 01 ASCII code H3031 should be specified The unit number of the PLC is specified by the system register 3 Text The content differs depending on the command The content should be noted in all upper case oo aa the fixed a tor p pri rira R C S X 0 0 0 1 CR N Specification and name data to be written Command code ASCII code H23 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically The parity check can be skipped by entering ASCII code H2A2A instead of the BCC 5 Terminator End code Messages must always end with a Cp ASCII code HOD IEF ner Note When writing The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command
276. using a Step ladder programming tool All points Link relay can be also held Link register register Type of backup battery The settings of the operation memory area such as data regiters and system registers No 6 to No 14 are necessary Name Battery Product No AFP8801 9 13 5 7 2 Settings of Battery Error Alarm and Hold Area Setting of the battery error alarm Setting the battery error alarm enables you to monitor the remaining backup battery level By default the battery error alarm is set to off in the system register settings For using the battery check the box of the system register No 4 Alarm Battery Error of the control unit Dialog box of PLC Configuration setting PLC Configuration Untitle1 Hold Non hald 1 Hald Non hold 2 if Mo 20 Disable settings for duplicated output Time ae ae W No 3 Stop when an lO yverfication eror occurs Controller input settings HSC Controller output settings PLS Prah Interrupt pulse catch settings lw Mo 26 Stop when an operation emor occurs Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input LE0A Only Tool Port COM Part No 4 Alarm Battery Error Cancel Bead PLC Initialize Help Settings of Hold area Non hold area The settings of the operation memory area such as data registers and system registers No 6
277. ut X0 X5 Operation start signal 0 Inverter operation signal Speed Positioning operation running RO Positioning operation start 0 5000 Number of pulses ok es ee Program When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops Positioning done pulse High speed counter CHO control flag R9110 R102 Positioning operations running R100 R101 HoF Positioning operations start R101 Resets elapsed value of HFI omv Ko DT90300 _ 4 t high speed counter CHO F167HCIRKO K5000 Y0 _ 4 Target value match off instruction YO goes off when elapsed value of sets high speed counter CHO When elapsed value reaches 5000 R101 O Eee counter CHO reaches 5000 Set the inverter operation signal YO R9110 R100 TO R102 DF R102 Positioning done pulse 0 5 s 0 1 s type timer Setting K5 and using it as a 0 5 s timer 7 13 7 4 Pulse Output Function 7 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and the contents of the controls number deceleration stop elapsed value counter during the pulse output control JOG operation F172 Outputs pulses as long as the execution condition is on F177 Performs the home return in a specified channel Trapezoidal Automatically outputs pulses with the trapezoidal control by contro
278. ut is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 Up to four driver systems can be connected Specify PLS SIGN for the control code of F171 to F177 instructions lt When using CH0 gt FP XO Home input Near home x5 input 3 x0 Driver Pulse output YO P Y1 Direction output X0 or any other input can be specified for the near home input sar Reference lt 7 2 1 Table of Specifications gt lt When using CH2 gt FP X0 Home input Near home xT input 3 x1 Driver Pulse output y2 P Y3 Direction output X1 or any other input can be specified for the near home input Wiring example FP XO Input terminal Home sensor x5 Near home sensor Positioning start Positioning start Home return start JOG start JOG start Overrun ill ane a a g O b con acon a contact b contact tact tact Stepping iey Moving table i mini Stepping motor driver Output terminal Common Pulse output CW CW input Pulse output CCW Y1 Ta Power RIRZRIR2 supply Note 24 DC Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a resister of 2 KQ 1 2 W to R1 and connect a resistor of 2 kQ 1 2 W 470 Q 2 W to R2 Table of I O allocation I O No Description X5 Home sensor input XO Near home sensor input X1 Positioning start signal
279. uted at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same time should be set for all linked PLCs The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the PLCs are connected to the link If short time has been set the transmission assurance relay may not function properly The shortest time that can be set is 100 ms 6 45 6 7 MODBUS RTU Communication For L40MR and L60MR types 6 7 1 Overview of Functions The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP X0 and other devices including our FP X FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions Enables the communication between the devices of max 255 units as the master function and slave function is equipped About MODBUS RTU The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them There are ASCII mode and RTU binary mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FP X0 is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible Maste
280. utput in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Q Available X Not available Not available partially 1 The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels 2 This instruction is available for FPX C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H 14 54 FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FPX ad me FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH A Boolean Ope Description A rand Screen display instructions F180 FP e screen SCR S1 S2 Register the screen displayed on a be Rem EL registration F181 FP e screen S Specify the screen to be displayed display on the FP e 3 7 x x x x x x switching Basic function instruction Time constant FILTR S1 S2 Executes the filter processing for processing S3 D the specified input ee T ae EE EEE 32 bit R900D after 0 01 s x set value Data transfer instructions TEE E a ena P190 data move PMV3 S3 Do IK o F191 Three 32 bit DMV3 S1 S2 a S1 gt Ey z S2 1 m E Se a Logic
281. utput side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads If the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again If the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool If the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input output function If the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check If the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 1 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer If the power is not supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply Check of
282. ve areas are split into multiple segments Send area Receive area Receive area Send area Send area Receive area Receive area Send area 6 39 6 6 5 Setting the Largest Unit Number for PC PLC Link The largest unit number can be set using system register no 47 using system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 Sample setting 1st unit Unit no 1 Is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set A largest unit no of 2 is set for each 1st unit Unit no 1 Is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set 3rd unit Unit no 3 is set 4th unit Unit no 4 is set A largest unit no of 4 is set for each n Nth unit Unit no N is set A largest unit no of N is set for each Note Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 in system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 For all PLCs which are linked the same value should be set for the largest unit number If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set default 16 or the largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive or the unit number settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on the response time for the PC P
283. ve data As for the FP X0 L40MR and L60MR connect to the COM port terminals RS485 Data register DT fi et Transmitted data Data transmission using F159 MTRN Received data Data is received into receive buffer Data is sent and received E T g through the data registers System register settings No Name SetValue No 412 Selection of communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication format Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit szccsccecee 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist STX exist When using COM port 19200 bps 115200 bps COM port Starting address for receive buffer DTO to DT8191 Default DTO For L40MR and L60MR types COM port Receive buffer capacity 0 to 2048 words Default 2048 words For L40MR and L60MR types L14R L30R DTO to DT2499 Default DTO Starting address for receive buffer L40R L60R DDTO to DT8191 Default DT4096 Tool port L14R L30R 0 to 128 words Default 128 words Receive buffer capacity Note L40R L60R 0 to 2048 words Default 2048 words Note Both the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the systerm register No 415 should be set for the COM port 6 30 6 6 PC PLC link Function For L40MR and L60MR types 6 6 1 Overview PC PLC link function The FP X0 supports the link system that connects the PC PLC link corresponding to
284. ve load Example of surge absorber Resistance R 50 Capacity C 0 47 uF When using a DC inductive load Diode Output FP X0 terminal Diode Reverse voltage 3 times the load voltage Averag rectified torward current Load current or more Varistor Output terminal FP X0 5 9 Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below Resistor Inductor wii Output 4 FP x0 terminal terminal FP X0 5 4 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings Isolate input output power lines e Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity e Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together e Separate the input output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100mm e Wirings other than the above specifications or incorrect wirings may cause the fault or malfunction Others e Wiring should be carried out after the power supply to the PLC was turned off e Also turn of the power supply when the control unit expansion units and various cassettes are connected If they are connected during the power supply is on it may cause the fault or malfunc
285. when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO The address of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 or DT90017 and DT90018 It varies according to the model to be used DT9017 DT9018 FP e FPO FPOR FPO mode DT90017 DT90018 FP FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP2 FR2SH FP10SH Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available 14 71 Remote I O commu nication error MEW NET F attribute error Expansion unit power supply sequence error Opera tion status Description and steps to take S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 3 or 4 has been detected error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication error is stored Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO MEW NET F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power down of a slave station FP2 FR2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO In the unit
286. with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click Tool Port or COM Port from the left list Dialog box of PLC system register setting Tool port selection screen PLC Configuration Untitle1 Sai Ho d410 9 Unit No 1 No 4 3 Communication Format No 412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits Computer Lirik Parity Odd Y Controller input settings HSC Modem Enabled a Stop Bit i Controller output settings PLS Prah Interrupt pulse catch settings CR STH not exist No415 Baudrate 9600 bps 4096 2048 Cancel Bead PLC Initialize Help No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode Click Computer Link No 413 Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port The terminator and header cannot be changed Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator Cannot be set Header Cannot be set No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Set the value to match the external device connected to the communication port Both the baud rate switches on the side of the unit and the system register No 415 should be set for the COM port g C Note Select Computer Lin
287. word in the menu bar The Set PLC Password dialog box is displayed Set PLC Password Untitle1 j PLE Home Settings Current status 2 Password is not set Close Available ret counts 3 counts eE digit number S Help f 4 digits Hex Operation Mode f Access f Protect f Unprotect o digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 3 Set the items in the table below and click on the Settings button Digit number Select 8 digits Operation Mode Select Protect 8 digits password Enter a 8 digit password Check the box of the function to use Limited distribution function Setting of FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Enable the upload protection setting Set that PLC cannot be uploaded IEF er Note This function is available only when a 8 digit password has been set 8 10 8 3 3 Table of Corresponding Operations of FP Memory Loader Security Function Note that the operation differs according to the combination of the program stored in the FP memory loader and the status of the PLC to which is written Version check list Status of destination PLC 4 digit password 8 digit password Program in FP memory loader Protected Protected a Password is unset or 4 bit or 8 bit password is set Notset
288. written according to the results of operation However as the R or Y is set reset again right before the peripheral service as the above procedure C the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly rewritten to a specified value 11 13 11 14 Chapter 12 Specifications 12 1 Table of Specifications 12 1 1 General Specifications Description Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 10 to 95 RH at25 C non condensing 10 to 95 RH at25 C non condensing Between transistor output terminals and relay output terminals Between input terminals and power supply earth terminals 2300 V AC for 1 min Breakdown voltage Note1 Note2 Between relay output terminals and power supply earth terminals Between transistor output terminals and power supply earth terminals Between power supply terminal and earth terminal 1500 V AC for 1 min Between Input terminal and transistor output terminal 500 V AC for 1 min Between input terminal and output terminal terminals 100 MQ or more Insulation resistance Between input terminals and power supply earth 500 V DC Between output terminals and power supply earth megohm meter terminals Between power supply terminal and earth terminal 5 to 8 4 Hz single amplitude of 3 5 mm 1 cycle min Vibration resistance 8 4 to 150 Hz constant acceleration of 9 8 m s 1 cycle min 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 147 m s 4 times on 3
289. xecution when the TERK predetermined trigger turns on in the TEST RUN mode only O Available Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 In the FR2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses 3 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 14 37 FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH H Z S Indicates the end of a main program Conditional CNDE The operation of program is ended when pas pf a CEs al ll A Step ladder instructions Startstep SSTP ma The start of program n for process oy I control T SE H A a Starts the specified process n and afo l clears the process currently started 3 Scan execution type NSTP __ Starts the specified process n and clears the process currently started epr B Pulse execution type Resets the specified process n 3 Clear multi SCLR N i Resets multiple processes specified by 5 laulo 5 ple steps H Hisar n1 and n2 Step end STPE End of step ladder area naiai Subrouti
290. xpansion FPO adapter Power supply connector 24V DC Supply the power of 24 V DC The provided power supply cable AFP0581 is used for the connection Supply the power from the service power supply for the input of the FP X control unit FPO expansion connector Connects the FPO expansion unit Expansion hook This hook is used to secure the FPO expansion unit DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the expansion unit to attach toa DIN rail at a touch The lever is also used for installation on the mounting plate slim type AFP0803 General specifications pT ote Specifications Rated voltage Voltage regulation Inrush current 20A or less 24 V DC at 25 C Fuse Built in Replacement is not available Non isolated o Insulation system Non isolated Power supply connector 3 pin connector Power supply cable AFP0581 is provided 3 10 Chapter 4 I O Allocation 4 1 V O Allocation Control Unit l i XO to X9F 1st Expansion unit 2nd Expansion unit 3rd Expansion unit Y0 to YOF X300 to X39F X400 to X49F X500 to X59F Y300 to Y39F Y400 to Y49F Y500 to Y59F CIAAMAAQAAT TAMMRQAQAAAAQAAHAAGASR VOOCOOOCOOCOOE Allocation of I O Numbers Unit type 1 O number Control unit XO to X9F WX0 to WX9 YO to YOF WYO to WY9 Expansion 1st unit X300 to X39F WX30 to WX39 Y300 to Y39F WY30 to WY39 Expansion 2nd unit X400 to X49F WX40 to WX49 Y400 to Y49F WY40 to WY49 Expansion 3rd unit X5
291. y 328 kbytes 0 5 ms unit 0 5 ms to 600 ms Available Program editing during RUN Available High speed counter Single phase 4 chs Max 20 kHz or Single phase 4 chs Max 50 kHz or RA 2 phase 2chs Max 20kHz 2 phase 2chs Max 20kHz Pulse output 1 ch Pulse output 2 chs Pulse output Max 20 kHz or Max 20 kHz or Pulse output 2 chs Max 50 kHz or PWM output PWM output 1 ch PWM output 2 chs PWM output 2 chs Max 3 kHz Max 1 6 kHz Max 1 6 kHz Pulse catch input interrupt 8 points Input of main unit 8 points XO to X7 input including high speed counter and interrupt input Periodical interrupt 0 5 ms unit 0 5 ms to 1 5 s 10 ms unit 10 ms to 30s 2 chs 10 bit resolution The following input can be used individually for each channel Potentiometer Volume input Min potentiomenter resistance 5kQ Resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 Accuracy 1 0 F S External resistance accuracy Thermister input Analog input None Allowable thermister resistance External thermister min resistance External resistance gt 2kQ Resolution 10 bits KO to K1023 Accuracy 1 0 F S External thermister accuracy Voltage input Absolute max input voltage 10 V Resolution 10 bits KO to K1023 Accuracy 2 5 F S F S 10 V Clock calender Backup by F12 Data register 2500 words Data register 8192 words Flash j ROM Automatic backu SOUMO G PAIMS oo P ae o D backup p Internal relay 5
292. y terminal block Power supply terminals for driving the PLC internal circuit A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Q DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the units to attach to a DIN rail at a touch 4 Expansion connector L40R L40MR L60R and L60MR types Connector for connecting the expansion I O unit and expansion FPO adapter 45 Space and connector for installing battery L40R L40MR L60R and L60MR types It is used for installing an optional backup battery 2 3 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 1 AC Power Supply Item Specifications Rated voltage 100 to 240 V AC Voltage regulation range 85 to 264 V AC L14 35A or less at 240 V AC 25 C Inrush current L30 L40 L60 40A or less at 240 V AC 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals pierna aye SUPPI paN 20 000 hours at 55 C Guaranteed life Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation 2 2 2 Service Power supply for Input Output L30 L40 and L60 only O ttem O Specifications Rated output voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated output current Overcurrent protection function N Available M3 Note This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily which protects the output short circuit If the short circuit is detected all the power supply
293. ycfrde892 r to the INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode selector in the RUN position If the same error occurs after this please contact your dealer gt Oo T T gt eee gt gt gt E gt Abnormality was detected when the multi CPU system was used Please contact your dealer O ajaja i E E The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The IC memory card installed is not compatible Replace the IC memory card compatible with FP2SH FP10SH MEW NET W2 MCU The MEWNET W2 link unit or MCU Multi communication unit is not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter The error specified by the F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction is occurred gt Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose p gt gt gt S l gt gt EZ Oo S ee d gt eee eee ene BE A Available 14 73 14 4 3 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Description NACK error Link system error WACK error
294. yo y v2 Y4 YA yc Y2wys e2 Nc col c1 c2 ys y5 lve ys c4 vB YD yat yo ca L Power L Not used AFPX E30T AC power supply terminal input HODES oo Mee PPR PSs Output terminal Input terminal j ov v1 v3 ys y7 J yo yB YD Lett Power supply 24v Yo Service power supply for input output 3 8 for YO to Y7 yo y2 v4 ve v8 YA YC NC isn Power suoply for Y8 to YD Output terminal Not used AFPX E30P AC power supply terminal input Input tenminal i J O d d WU Wl Lt Lt tt Lt Lt E pt N jcom x1 x3 xs x7 xo XB XD XF Jo v1 ys ys v7 yo yB YD Left Power supply zav vo va val vel Lys TVA TYCENC peg S TET PT TPT UG TTT meen L L Service power Output terminal Not used supply for input output AFPX E30TD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal not v1 3 ys v7 yo vB YD Len Power supply nc vol v2 va vel va valve nc tyr FESE ERR R ERR Ld Not used Output terminal Not used AFPX E30PD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal t OF O Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q O Q Q Q z com x1 x3 xs x7 x9 xB xD XF nc v1 3 ys yz J yo yB YD ety Power supply Tne vol v2 vs vel ve

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents